3RT19 [ETC]

Monitoring and Control Devices; 测控装置
3RT19
型号: 3RT19
厂家: ETC    ETC
描述:

Monitoring and Control Devices
测控装置

装置 监控
文件: 总114页 (文件大小:2456K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Monitoring and  
Control Devices  
7
7/2  
Introduction  
3TK28 Safety Relays  
7/102 With electronic enabling circuits  
7/105 With relay enabling circuits  
7/108 With contactor relay enabling circuits  
Ch. 6 3RA71 load feeders  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor  
Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 motor  
management and control devices  
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5 motor protection  
and control devices  
3UF18 current transformers  
for overload protection  
3UL22 summation current  
transformers  
7/5  
with integrated safety functions  
7/26  
7/35  
7/40  
Interface Converters  
7/112 3RS17 interface converters  
1) See Catalog IK PI · 2005  
"Industrial Communication for  
Automation and Drives"  
LOGO! Logic Modules  
General data  
7/41  
7/42  
7/43  
IK PI  
IK PI  
LOGO! Modular basic variants  
LOGO! Modular pure variants  
LOGO! Modular extension modules  
LOGO! Modular communications  
modules  
AS-Interface connection for LOGO!  
LOGO!Contact  
LOGO! Software  
1)  
1)  
1)  
1)  
IK PI  
IK PI  
7/44  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
General data  
3RP15 timing relays  
7/45  
7/49  
in industrial enclosure, 22.5 mm  
7/55  
7/58  
7/60  
3RP20 timing relays, 45 mm  
7PV timing relays for panel mounting  
3RT19 timing relays  
for mounting to contactors  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays  
for Electrical and Additional  
Measurements  
7/63  
7/69  
7/73  
7/76  
7/78  
Line monitoring  
Voltage monitoring  
Current monitoring  
Power factor monitoring  
Insulation monitoring  
for ungrounded AC networks  
Insulation monitoring  
for ungrounded DC networks  
7/80  
7/82  
7/85  
Level monitoring  
Speed monitoring  
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring  
Relays  
7/87  
7/90  
7/92  
General data  
Relays, analog adjustable  
Relays, digitally adjustable to  
DIN 3440  
7/94  
Relays, digitally adjustable  
for up to 3 sensors  
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection  
For PTC sensors  
7/96  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
Monitoring and Control Devices  
Introduction  
Overview  
The advantages at a glance  
3UF7  
3UF5  
6ED1 052  
Page  
Order No.  
SIMOCODE 3UF motor management and control devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
• Compact, modular design  
• Unique flexibility in terms of functionality and hardware  
configuration  
3UF7  
3UF5  
7/5  
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5  
7/26  
• Wide functional range from the distributed I/O system to the  
autonomous motor management system  
• All control functions from the direct starter to the pole-  
changing switch with reversing contactor  
• All motor sizes  
• Integration in all PROFIBUS-capable automation systems  
• Application in low-voltage controlgear for motor control  
centers on the process industry  
• Increases plant availability  
• Saves costs during construction, commissioning and  
operation of the plant  
• Extensive data of the motor feeder available everywhere on  
the PROFIBUS  
• All protection, monitoring and control functions for the motor  
feeder in a single system  
3UF18 current transformers for overload  
protection  
• Protection converter for activating overload relays or for use 3UF18  
with SIMOCODE pro  
• Ensures proportional current transfer up to a multiple of the  
primary rated current  
7/35  
7/40  
3UL22 summation current transformers  
• Senses fault currents in machines and plants  
• Senses ground fault currents  
3UL22  
LOGO! logic modules  
LOGO! logic modules  
• Compact, user-friendly and low-cost solution for simple  
control tasks  
• Universal:  
- Building installation and wiring (lighting, shutters,  
awnings, doors, access control, barriers, ventilation  
systems ...)  
- Control cabinet installation  
- Machine and device construction (pumps, small presses,  
compressors, hydraulic lifts, conveyors ...)  
- Special controls for conservatories and greenhouses  
- Signal preprocessing for other controllers  
• Flexible expansion depending on the application  
LOGO! Modular basic variants  
• With display, pushbuttons and an interface for connecting 6ED1 052-1  
extension modules  
7/42  
LOGO! Modular pure variants  
• Without display and pushbuttons but with an interface for  
connecting extension modules  
6ED1 052-2  
7/43  
LOGO! Modular extension modules  
LOGO! Modular communications modules  
• For connection to LOGO! Modular basic variants with  
digital inputs and outputs or analog inputs and outputs  
6ED1 055-1  
IK PI1)  
IK PI1)  
• For integrating LOGO! in an instabus KNX EIB system or as 3RK1 400  
an AS-Interface slave  
LOGO!Power  
• Power supply for converting the supply voltage of  
100 ... 240 V AC into an operational voltage of 24 V DC or  
12 V DC  
6EP1 3  
IK PI1)  
LOGO!Contact  
• Switching module for switching resistive loads and motors 6ED1 057-4  
directly  
IK PI1)  
7/44  
LOGO! Software  
• For switchgear program generation on the PC  
6ED1 058  
1) See Catalog IK PI · 2005 "Industrial Communication for Automation and  
Drives"  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/2  
Monitoring and Control Devices  
Introduction  
The advantages at a glance  
3RP  
7PV  
3UG45 11  
Order No.  
3UG46 14  
Page  
7/49  
3RP, 7PV timing relays  
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,  
22.5 mm  
• Low-cost solution with monofunctions such as response  
delay, off-delay, clock-pulse, wye-delta function and  
multifunction  
3RP15  
3RP20  
• Wide-range voltage designs  
3RP20 timing relays, 45 mm  
• The solution for small mounting depths  
• The low mounting height reduces the tier spacing  
7/55  
7PV timing relays for panel mounting  
• Digital variant  
7PV  
7/58  
7/60  
3RT19 timing relays for mounting onto contactors • Saves space because the relay is mounted onto the  
3RT19  
contactor  
• Wiring advantages thanks to direct contacting  
with contactor  
3UG monitoring relays for electrical and additional measurements  
Line monitoring  
Phase sequence  
• Low-cost solution for monitoring the phase sequence  
3UG45 11  
3UG45 12  
3UG45 13  
7/63  
7/63  
7/64  
Phase sequence, phase failure, phase unbalance • Wide voltage range from 160 ... 690 V  
Phase sequence, phase failure, phase unbalance • Analog adjustable  
and undervoltage  
• Wide voltage range from 160 ... 690 V  
• Digitally adjustable with LCD display for indication of  
ACTUAL value and device status  
• Wide voltage range from 160 ... 690 V  
3UG46 14  
7/64  
Phase sequence, phase failure, phase unbalance • Digitally adjustable with LCD display for indication of  
3UG46 15  
3UG46 16  
3UG46 17  
7/65  
7/65  
7/65  
and overvoltage and undervoltage  
ACTUAL value and device status  
• Wide voltage range from 160 ... 690 V  
Phase sequence, phase and N conductor failure,  
phase unbalance, overvoltage and undervoltage  
Automatic correction of the direction of rotation in  
case of wrong phase sequence, phase failure,  
phase unbalance, overvoltage and undervoltage  
Automatic correction of the direction of rotation in  
case of wrong phase sequence, phase and  
N conductor failure, phase unbalance, overvoltage  
and undervoltage  
3UG46 18  
7/65  
Voltage monitoring  
Voltage monitoring with internal power supply for • Digitally adjustable with LCD display for indication of  
3UG46 33  
7/69  
7/70  
overvoltage and undervoltage  
ACTUAL value and device status  
• Wide measuring ranges  
Voltage monitoring with auxiliary voltage for  
overvoltage and undervoltage  
3UG46 31/32  
• Variant for wide voltage range  
Current monitoring  
Current monitoring with auxiliary voltage for  
overvoltage and undervoltage  
• Digitally adjustable with LCD display for indication of  
ACTUAL value and device status  
• Wide measuring ranges  
3UG46 21/22  
3UG30 14  
7/73  
• Variant for wide voltage range  
Power factor monitoring (motor load monitoring)  
Monitoring relay for overshoot and undershoot  
monitoring with internal power supply  
(window monitoring)  
• Upper and lower threshold value can be adjusted  
separately  
7/76  
7/78  
7/82  
Insulation resistance  
Monitoring of the insulation resistance for  
ungrounded AC or DC networks from 10 ... 110 kW • With or without memory  
• Test button  
3UG30 81,  
3UG30 82  
• Switchable measuring range  
Level monitoring  
Fill level and resistance  
• As single-step or two-step controls for inlet or outlet  
3UG35 01  
monitoring of conducting liquids or as  
resistance threshold switch  
• Variable, wide range from 5 ... 100 kW  
• UNDER/OVER adjustable  
Speed monitoring  
Underspeed monitoring  
• Together with a sensor for monitoring continuous pulses  
• With or without memory  
• Adjustable ON delay  
3UG30 51  
7/85  
• 1, 2 and 3 changeover contacts  
• Hard gold-plated contacts in combination and wide voltage  
range versions  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/3  
Monitoring and Control Devices  
Introduction  
The advantages at a glance  
3RS10  
3RN1  
3TK28  
Order No.  
3RS17  
Page  
7/90  
3RS10, 3RS11, 3RS20 temperature monitoring relays  
For monitoring the temperatures of solids, liquids, and gases  
Relays, analog adjustable  
• Separate versions for overshoot and undershoot  
• For simple monitoring tasks  
3RS10,  
3RS11  
• For PT100 or thermoelements J and K  
• Variable hysteresis  
Relays, digitally adjustable acc. to DIN 3440  
Relays, digitally adjustable for up to 3 sensors  
• For two-step or three-step controls  
• For monitoring heat generation plants  
• For PT100/1000, KTY83/84, NTC or thermoelements  
type J, K, T, E, N, R, S, B  
3RS10,  
3RS11,  
3RS20  
7/92  
7/94  
• For simultaneously monitoring several sensors  
• Especially suited for monitoring motor winding temperatures  
• For PT100/1000, KTY83/84, NTC  
3RS10  
3RN1 thermistor motor protection  
For PTC sensors  
• Relays for monitoring motor winding temperatures with  
type A PTC sensors  
3RN1  
7/96  
• Integrated with ATEX license  
• Closed-circuit principle  
• Depending on the version: With short-circuit and open-circuit  
detection, zero voltage safety, manual/auto/remote RESET,  
1 CO, 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 CO, 1 NO + 1 CO or 2 CO  
hard gold-plated  
3TK28 safety relays  
With electronic enabling circuits  
• Permanent function checking  
• No wear because switched electronically  
• High switching frequency  
3TK28 4  
7/102  
• Long electrical endurance  
• Evaluation of solid-state sensors  
• Sensor lead up to max. 2000 m  
• Cascading possible  
• Insensitive to vibrations and dirt  
• Compact design, low weight  
• Approved for the world market  
With relay enabling circuits  
• Compact design  
• Floating safe outputs  
3TK28 2, 3TK28 3 7/105  
• Also suitable for press and punch controls  
• Can be used up to an ambient temperature of max. 70 °C  
With contactor relay enabling circuits  
• Floating enabling circuits  
• AC-15/DC-13 switching capacity  
• Safe isolation  
• Long mechanical and electrical endurance  
• Certified as a complete unit  
• Fault minimization and cost reduction through factory wiring  
• Low installation costs  
3TK28 5  
3TK28 5  
7/108  
Ch. 6  
3RA71 load feeders  
with integrated safety functions  
• Available in fused or fuseless configuration  
• Floating enabling circuits  
• AC-1/AC-3 switching capacity  
• Certified as a complete unit  
• Long mechanical and electrical endurance  
• Rated operational voltage up to 690 V  
• Safe isolation  
3RS17 interface converters  
Converters for standard signals and  
non-standard variables  
• All terminals protected against polarity reversing and  
overvoltage up to 30 V  
• For electrical isolation and conversion of analog signals  
• Short-circuit resistant outputs  
• From 6.2 mm width  
• Switchable multi-range converters  
3RS17  
7/112  
• Variants with manual/automatic switch for setpoint input or  
for the conversion of analog variables into frequency  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/4  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
Overview  
Design  
SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management sys-  
tem for motors with constant speeds in the low-voltage perfor-  
mance range. It optimizes the connection between I&C and  
motor feeder, increases plant availability and allows significant  
savings to be made for startup, operation and maintenance of a  
system.  
General  
SIMOCODE pro is a modularly constructed motor management  
system which is subdivided into two device series with different  
functional scopes:  
• SIMOCODE pro C  
• SIMOCODE pro V  
When SIMOCODE pro is installed in the low-voltage switchgear  
cabinet, it is the intelligent interface between the higher-level  
automation system and the motor feeder and includes the  
following:  
Both series (systems) are made up of different hardware  
components (modules):  
System  
SIMOCODE pro C  
SIMOCODE pro V  
• Multifunctional, solid-state full motor protection which is  
independent of the automation system  
Modules  
• Basic unit 1  
• Basic unit 2  
• Flexible software instead of hardware for the motor control  
• Detailed operational, service and diagnostics data  
• Open communication through PROFIBUS DP, the standard for  
fieldbus systems  
• Current measuring module • Current measuring module or  
current/voltage measuring  
voltage  
• Operator panel (optional)  
• Operator panel (optional)  
• Expansion modules  
(optional)  
Per feeder each system always comprises one basic unit and  
one separate current measuring module. The two modules are  
connected together electrically through the system interface  
with a connection cable and can be mounted mechanically  
connected as a unit (one behind the other) or separately (side  
by side). The motor current to be monitored is decisive only for  
the choice of current measuring module.  
An operator panel for mounting in the control cabinet door is  
optionally connectable through a second system interface on  
the basic unit. Both the current measurement module and the  
operator panel are electrically supplied by the basic unit through  
the connection cable. More inputs, outputs and functions can be  
added to basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) by means of optional  
expansion modules, thus supplementing the inputs and outputs  
already existing on the basic unit.  
All modules are connected together by connection cables.  
The connection cables are available in various lengths. The  
maximum distance between the modules (e.g. between the  
basic unit and the current measurement module) must not  
exceed 2 m. The total length of all the connection cables in a  
single system must not be more than 3 m.  
SIMOCODE pro designed for mixed operation  
Depending on functional requirements, the two systems can be  
used simultaneously without any problems and without any addi-  
tional outlay in a low-voltage system. SIMOCODE pro C is fully  
upward-compatible to SIMOCODE pro V. The same compo-  
nents are used. The parameterization of SIMOCODE pro C can  
be transferred without any problems. Both systems have the  
same removable terminals and the same terminal designations.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/5  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
SIMOCODE pro C, basic unit 1  
SIMOCODE pro V, basic unit 2  
The compact system for  
• Direct-on-line and reversing starters  
• Actuation of a circuit-breaker (MCCB)  
with up to 4 binary inputs, up to 3 monostable relay outputs and  
one thermistor connection (binary PTC)  
The variable system which offers all SIMOCODE pro C functions  
plus many additional functions. Basic unit 2 supports the  
following control functions:  
• Direct-on-line and reversing starters  
• Star/delta starters, also with direction reversal  
• Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing  
switch); also with direction reversal  
• Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings (also  
with direction reversal)  
• Slide control  
• Solenoid valve actuation  
• Actuation of a circuit-breaker (MCCB)  
• Soft starter actuation (also with direction reversal)  
The basic unit 1 is available in two different variants for the  
following supply voltages:  
• 24 V DC  
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC  
Basic unit 2 has 4 binary inputs, 3 monostable relay outputs and  
one thermistor connection (binary PTC). The type and number of  
inputs and outputs can be increased by means of additional  
expansion modules.  
Basic unit 2 is available in two different variants for the following  
supply voltages:  
• 24 V DC  
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC  
SIMOCODE pro C, basic unit 1  
Inputs:  
• 4 binary inputs, with internal supply from 24 V DC  
Outputs:  
• 3 (2+1) monostable relay outputs  
Thermistor connection for binary PTC  
PROFIBUS interface:  
• 9-pole SUB-D or  
Terminal connection  
Connection of the supply voltage:  
• 24 V DC or  
SIMOCODE pro V, basic unit 2  
Inputs:  
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC  
• 4 binary inputs, with internal supply from 24 V DC  
Test/Reset button  
3 LEDs  
Outputs:  
• 3 (2+1) monostable relay outputs  
2 system interfaces for connection of  
• a current measuring module and  
• an operator panel  
Thermistor connection for binary PTC  
PROFIBUS interface:  
• 9-pole SUB-D or  
Terminal connection  
Basic unit 1 is suitable for standard rail mounting or, with  
additional push-in lugs, for fixing to a mounting plate.  
Connection of the supply voltage:  
• 24 V DC or  
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC  
Test/Reset button  
3 LEDs  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/6  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
2 system interfaces for connection of  
• a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring  
module  
Current measuring modules for the following current ranges are  
offered:  
• 0.3 ... 3 A with straight-through current transformer  
• 2.4 ... 25 A with straight-through current transformer  
• 10 ... 100 A with straight-through current transformer  
• 20 ... 200 A with straight-through current transformer or  
busbar connection  
• expansion modules and  
• an operator panel  
Basic unit 2 is suitable for standard rail mounting or, with  
additional push-in lugs, for fixing to a mounting plate.  
• 63 ... 630 A with busbar connection  
Current measuring modules (current ranges)  
For motor currents up to 820 A, a current measuring module for  
0.3 ... 3 A, for example, can be used in combination with a  
3UF1 8 interposing/current transformer.  
The current measurement module is selected for each feeder  
according to the rated motor current to be monitored. Various  
current measurement modules for current ranges from 0.3 to  
630 A are available for this purpose. The current measurement  
module is connected to the basic unit by a connection cable and  
is supplied with electricity by the basic unit through this connec-  
tion cable. Current measurement modules up to 100 A are suit-  
able for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the  
mounting plate by means of additional push-in lugs. Similarly,  
current measurement modules up to 200 A can also be mounted  
on standard mounting rails or be fixed directly to mounting  
plates by means of fixtures integrated in the housing. Finally, cur-  
rent measuring modules up to 630 A can only be mounted with  
the integrated screw fixtures.  
Current/voltage measuring modules (voltage range)  
Current/voltage measuring modules have the same functions as  
the current measuring modules. However, they can only be used  
in combination with basic unit 2. They offer the same current  
ranges for the rated motor current. Mounting on standard mount-  
ing rails, on mounting plates or directly on the contactor is also  
the same as with the current measuring modules. They can also  
measure voltages up to 690 V in the main circuit, which is nec-  
essary for calculating or monitoring power-related measured  
variables. Current/voltage measuring modules have additional  
removable terminals, to which the voltages of all three phases of  
the main circuit are connected (3-pole). An additional 3-core  
cable can be used, for example, to directly connect the main cir-  
cuit from the busbar terminals of the current/voltage measuring  
modules to the voltage measuring terminals.  
Note:  
Current measuring modules for up to 100 A set current can be  
mechanically connected to the corresponding basic unit and  
mounted with it as a unit (one behind the other). For larger  
current measuring modules, only separate mounting is possible.  
Note:  
Current/voltage measuring modules can only be mounted  
separately from the associated basic unit 2. A current/voltage  
measuring module can only be used with a basic unit 2, product  
version E02 and later (from April 2005).  
Width  
45 mm  
55 mm  
120 mm  
145 mm  
Current measuring  
modules  
Current/voltage  
measuring modules  
Set current  
To measure and monitor  
motor currents up to  
0.3 ... 3 A; 2.4 ... 25 A  
10 ... 100 A  
20 ... 200 A  
63 ... 630 A  
820 A, matching 3UF18  
interposing current  
Straight-through transformers  
transformers are avail-  
Busbar connection  
able for the current mea-  
suring modules and  
current/voltage measur-  
ing modules.  
Sizes and set current of the current measuring modules and the current/voltage measuring modules  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/7  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
Operator panel  
Expansion with additional binary I/Os through digital  
modules  
The operator panel is used to control the motor feeder and can  
replace all conventional pushbuttons and indicator lights to save  
space. This means that SIMOCODE pro or the feeder can be  
operated directly at the control cabinet and that the system  
interface is connected externally for easier parameterization or  
diagnostics using a PC/PG, for example.  
Up to two digital modules can be used to add additional binary  
inputs and relay outputs to basic unit 2. The input circuits of the  
digital modules are supplied from an external power supply. The  
following variants are available:  
• 4 inputs, supplied externally with 24 V DC and 2 monostable  
relay outputs  
The operator panel is connected to the basic unit over a  
connection cable from its rear system interface and is supplied  
electrically from the basic unit.  
• 4 inputs, supplied externally with 110 ... 240 V AC/DC and 2  
monostable relay outputs  
• 4 inputs, supplied externally with 24 V DC and 2 bistable  
relay outputs  
The operator panel has 5 freely assignable buttons and a total of  
10 LEDs, of which 7 LEDs can be used as required and  
assigned to any status signal.  
• 4 inputs, supplied externally with 110 ... 240 V AC/DC and 2  
bistable relay outputs  
A PC/PG can be connected to the front system interface over the  
PC cable.  
Up to two digital modules can be connected to one basic unit 2.  
All variants can be combined with each other.  
The operator panel is mounted in the control cabinet door or the  
front plate of, for example, a withdrawable unit and satisfies IP54  
degree of protection with the system interface covered.  
Operator panel for SIMOCODE pro  
• 10 LEDs  
• Labeling strips  
3UF7 300-1AB00-0 (left) and 3UF7 300-1AU00-0 (right) digital modules  
Test/reset button  
• 4 control keys  
• 2 system interfaces on the front with interface covers  
4 binary inputs, externally supplied with  
• 24 V DC or  
• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC  
Expansion modules for additional I/Os and functions  
2 relay outputs,  
With basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V), it is possible to expand the  
number and type of inputs and outputs in order to implement  
additional functions, for example. Each expansion module has  
two system interfaces on the front. Through the one system  
interface the expansion module is connected to the system  
interface of basic unit 2 using a connection cable, for example;  
through the second system interface, further expansion modules  
or the operator panel can be connected. The power supply for  
the expansion modules is provided by the connection cable  
through basic unit 2.  
• monostable or  
• bistable (the switching status of the relay outputs is also  
maintained following failure of the supply voltage on basic  
unit 2)  
1 Ready LED  
2 system interfaces for connection  
• to basic unit 2  
• of expansion modules  
• of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring  
module  
• of an operator panel  
All expansion modules are suitable for rail mounting or can be  
directly fixed to a mounting plate using additional plug-in lugs.  
Basic unit 2 can be extended on the whole with up to 5  
expansion modules.  
Note:  
For the implementation of some motor control functions, in  
addition to the relay outputs on basic unit 2, at least one further  
digital module is required.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/8  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
Expansion with a ground fault measuring module with an  
external summation current transformer  
Expansion of analog temperature monitoring with a  
temperature module  
Instead of ground fault monitoring using the current measuring  
modules or current/voltage measuring modules, it may be  
necessary, especially in high-impedance grounded networks, to  
implement ground fault monitoring for smaller ground fault  
currents using a summation current transformer. A ground fault  
module can be used to add an additional input to basic unit 2 for  
connection of a summation current transformer (3UL2 20.-.A).  
Independently of the thermistor motor protection of the basic  
units, up to 3 analog temperature sensors can be evaluated  
using a temperature module.  
The temperatures measured here can be completely integrated  
in the process, monitored and supplied to a higher-level  
automation system. The temperature module can be used, for  
example, for analog monitoring of the temperature of the motor  
windings or bearings or for monitoring the coolant or gear oil  
temperature. Various sensor types are supported (resistance  
sensors) for use in solid, liquid or gaseous media:  
• PT100/PT1000  
Maximum one ground fault module can be connected to one  
basic unit 2.  
• KTY83/KTY84  
• NTC  
Maximum one temperature module can be connected to one  
basic unit 2. The same sensor type must be used in all sensor  
measuring circuits.  
3UF7 500-1AA00-0 ground fault module  
1 input for connecting a summation current transformer  
(3UL2 20.-.A)  
1 Ready LED  
2 system interfaces for connection  
To basic unit 2  
3UF7 700-1AA00-0 temperature module  
• Of expansion modules  
3 inputs for connecting up to 3 resistance sensors in 2-wire or  
3-wire circuits  
• Of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring  
module  
• Of an operator panel  
1 Ready LED  
Note:  
2 system interfaces for connection  
To basic unit 2  
• Of expansion modules  
A ground fault module can only be used with a basic unit 2,  
product version E02 and later (from April 2005).  
• Of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring  
module  
• Of an operator panel  
Note:  
A temperature module can only be used with a basic unit 2,  
product version E02 and later (from April 2005).  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/9  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
Expansion with additional inputs/outputs by means of an  
analog module  
Safe isolation  
All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are safely isolated from each other  
in according to IEC 60947-1. That is, they are designed with  
double creepage and air distances. In the event of a fault,  
therefore, no parasitic voltages can be formed in neighboring  
circuits. The instructions of test report No. 2668 must be  
complied with.  
Basic unit 2 can be optionally expanded with analog inputs and  
outputs (0/4 ... 20 mA) by means of the analog module. It is then  
possible to measure and monitor any process variable that can  
be mapped on a 0/4 ... 20 mA signal. Typical applications are,  
for example, level monitoring for the implementation of dry run-  
ning protection for pumps or monitoring the degree of pollution  
of a filter using a differential pressure transducer. In this case the  
automation system has free access to the measured process  
variables. The analog output can be used, for example, to visu-  
alize process variables on a pointer instrument. The automation  
system also has free access to the output.  
EEx e and EEx d types of protection  
The overload protection and the thermistor motor protection of  
the SIMOCODE pro system comply with the requirements for  
overload protection of explosion-protected motors to the degree  
of protection:  
• EEx d "flameproof enclosure" e.g. according to EN 50018 or  
EN 60079-1  
• EEx e "increased safety" e.g. according to EN 50019 or  
EN 60079-7  
Maximum one analog module can be connected to one basic  
unit 2. Both inputs are set to a measuring range of either  
0 ... 20 mA or 4 ... 20 mA.  
When using SIMOCODE pro devices with a 24 V DC control  
voltage, electrical isolation must be ensured using a battery or a  
safety transformer according to EN 61558-2-6.  
EC type test certificate: BVS 04 ATEX F 003  
Test log: BVS PP 05.2029 EG.  
3UF7 400-1AA00-0 analog module  
Inputs:  
• 2 inputs for measuring 0/4 ... 20 mA signals  
Outputs:  
• 1 output to output a 0/4 ... 20 mA signal  
1 Ready LED  
2 system interfaces for connection  
To basic unit 2  
• Of expansion modules  
• Of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring  
module  
• Of an operator panel  
Note:  
An analog module can only be used with a basic unit 2, product  
version E02 and later (from April 2005).  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/10  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
Function  
Multifunctional, solid-state full motor protection  
Monitoring of adjustable limit values for the motor current  
• Current limit value monitoring is used for process monitoring  
independent of overload protection. Violation of a current limit  
value below the overload threshold can be an indication for a  
dirty filter in a pump or for an increasingly sluggish motor  
bearing, for example. Violation of the lower current limit value  
can be a first indication of a worn drive belt. SIMOCODE pro  
supports two-step monitoring of the motor current for freely  
selectable upper and lower current limit values. The response  
of SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and delayed if it  
reaches an alarm or tripping threshold.  
Current-dependent electronic overload protection with  
adjustable tripping characteristics (Classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30,  
35 and 40)  
• SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase or AC motors according  
to IEC 60947-4-1 requirements. The trip class can be adjusted  
in eight steps from Class 5 to Class 40. In this way, the break  
time can be adapted very accurately to the load torque which  
allows the motor to be utilized more effectively. In addition, the  
time until the overload tripping operation is performed is  
calculated and can be made available to the I&C system. After  
an overload tripping operation, the remaining cooling time can  
be displayed (characteristic curves for 2-pole and 3-pole  
loading in SIMOCODE pro System Manual).  
3)  
Voltage monitoring  
• By measuring the voltage directly at the circuit-breaker or at  
the fuses in the main circuit, even when the motor is  
deactivated, SIMOCODE pro can also obtain information  
about the reclosing capability of the feeder and signal it if  
required.  
Phase failure/unbalance protection  
• The level of the phase unbalance can be monitored and trans-  
mitted to the I&C system. If a specified limit value is violated,  
a defined and delayable response can be initiated. If the  
phase unbalance is larger than 50 %, the tripping time is also  
automatically reduced according to the overload characteris-  
tic since the heat generation of the motors increases in unbal-  
anced conditions.  
• SIMOCODE pro supports two-stage undervoltage monitoring  
for freely selectable limit values. The response of  
SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and delayed if it  
reaches an alarm or tripping threshold.  
3)  
Monitoring the active power  
• The active power characteristic of a motor provides an  
accurate statement of the actual loading over the complete  
range. Excessive loading will cause increased wear in the  
motor and can result in early failure. Insufficient active power  
can be an indication of, for example, motor idling.  
• SIMOCODE pro supports two-step monitoring of the active  
power for freely selectable upper and lower current limit  
values. The response of SIMOCODE pro can be freely  
configured and delayed if it reaches an alarm or tripping  
threshold.  
Stall protection  
• If the motor current rises above an adjustable blocking  
threshold (current threshold), a defined and delayable  
response can be configured for SIMOCODE pro. In this case,  
for example, the motor can be shut down independent of the  
overload protection. The blocking protection is only enabled  
after the configured class time has elapsed and avoids  
unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical loads as well as  
wear of the motor.  
Thermistor motor protection  
3)  
Monitoring the power factor  
• This protection function is based on direct temperature  
measurements by means of temperature sensors in the stator  
windings or in the enclosure of the motor. These protective  
functions should be used, in particular, in motors with high  
operating frequencies, heavy-duty starting, intermittent and/or  
braking operation, but also in the case of speeds lower than  
the rated speed. SIMOCODE pro supports connection and  
evaluation of several PTC sensors connected in series on the  
basic unit. In addition, the sensor measuring circuit can be  
monitored for short-circuits and wire breakages. If the  
temperature of the motor increases beyond a defined limit or  
if there is a fault in the sensor measuring circuit, a defined  
response can be configured.  
• Especially in the low-end performance range of a motor, the  
power factor varies more than the motor current or active  
power. Monitoring of the power factor is therefore particularly  
useful for distinguishing between motor idling and fault events  
such as a tear in a drive belt or a crack in a drive shaft.  
• SIMOCODE pro supports two-stage monitoring of power  
factor undershoot for freely selectable limit values. The  
response of SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and  
delayed if it reaches an alarm or tripping threshold.  
1)4)  
Temperature monitoring  
• The temperature can be monitored, for example, in the motor  
windings or at the bearings through up to three resistance  
sensors connected to the temperature module.  
Ground-fault monitoring (internally) with a current measuring  
module or current/voltage measuring module  
• SIMOCODE pro supports two-stage monitoring of overheating  
for freely selectable limit values. The response of  
SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and delayed if it  
reaches an alarm or tripping threshold. Temperature  
monitoring is always performed with reference to the highest  
temperature of all sensor measuring circuits used.  
• SIMOCODE pro acquires and monitors all three phase  
currents. With vector addition of the phase currents, the motor  
feeder can be monitored for possible fault currents or ground  
faults with the help of internal calculations. Internal earth fault  
monitoring is only available for motors with three-phase  
connections in directly grounded networks or in networks  
grounded with low impedance. The response of  
SIMOCODE pro when a ground fault is detected can be  
parameterized and delayed as required.  
Ground-fault monitoring (external) with summation current  
1)2)  
transformer  
• External ground-fault monitoring is normally implemented for  
networks that are grounded with high impedance. Using an  
additional summation current transformer (3UL2 20.-.A), even  
extremely low ground-fault currents can be measured. The  
response of SIMOCODE pro when a ground fault is detected  
can be parameterized and delayed as required. Fault current  
measurement is performed for each summation current  
transformer for the following fault currents: 0.3/0.5/1 A  
1) Using basic unit 2.  
2) An additional ground-fault module with a 3UL22 summation current  
transformer is required.  
3) Using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module.  
4) An additional temperature module is required.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/11  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
Monitoring additional process variables over analog inputs  
Regardless of whether a control command is sent to SIMOCODE  
pro via PROFIBUS DP using the operator module or via the  
buttons connected to the binary SIMOCODE pro inputs,  
SIMOCODE pro can execute these control commands  
simultaneously or in accordance with the enabled commands  
defined during configuration.  
1)2)  
(0/4 ... 20 mA)  
• The analog module enables SIMOCODE pro to measure  
additional process variables and monitor them. A pump can,  
for example, be protected against dry running in this manner  
with level monitoring or the degree of pollution of a filter can  
be measured using a differential pressure transducer. When a  
specified level is undershot, the pump can be deactivated  
and when a specified differential pressure is overshot, the filter  
can be cleaned.  
• SIMOCODE pro supports two-step monitoring of the corre-  
sponding process variable for freely selectable upper and  
lower current limit values. The response of SIMOCODE pro  
can be freely configured and delayed if it reaches an alarm or  
tripping threshold.  
These predefined control functions can also be flexibly adapted  
to each customized configuration of a motor feeder by means of  
freely configurable logic modules (truth tables, counters, timers,  
edge evaluation etc.).  
In addition, special standard functions are stored in  
SIMOCODE pro which can also be used to extend the protection  
and control functions, e.g.:  
1)  
• Power failure monitoring for automatic, time-staggered  
restart of motors following a network failure e.g. with the help  
of a separate voltage relay (voltage controller).  
3)  
Phase sequence detection  
• By detecting the phase sequence, SIMOCODE pro is able to  
make a statement about the direction of rotation of a motor. If  
the direction is incorrect, this can be reported or it can result  
in immediate shutdown of the affected motor.  
• Fault signaling modules for external faults with or without  
manual or automatic acknowledgement for generating internal  
messages or for tripping SIMOCODE pro in response to freely  
definable events (e.g. overspeed monitor has been  
activated). Designations/names can also be assigned to the  
external faults which are stored in the device and which are  
therefore also available to the I&C system.  
Monitoring of operating hours, downtime and number of starts  
• In order to prevent plant downtime caused by motor failure  
due to excessive motor operating times (wear) or excessive  
motor downtimes, SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating  
hours and downtime of a motor. When an adjustable limit value  
is violated, a message or alarm can be generated which can  
indicate that the corresponding motor must be serviced or  
replaced. After the motor has been replaced, the operating  
hours and downtimes can be reset, for example.  
To avoid excessive thermal loads and early wear of the motor,  
it is possible to limit the number of motor startups for a  
specifiable period. Alarms can indicate that only a small  
number of possible starts remain.  
• Emergency start function and reset of the thermal memory of  
SIMOCODE pro after tripping, i.e. immediate restart is  
possible (important, for example, for pumps used to  
extinguish fires).  
Test function for the load feeder circuit when the main control  
switch is open to test the control circuit while the main circuit  
is de-energized.  
Detailed operational, service and diagnostics data  
SIMOCODE pro provides a variety of operating, service and  
diagnostic data, such as:  
Flexible motor control implemented with software  
Operating data  
Many typical motor control functions have been predefined in  
SIMOCODE pro and are available for use:  
• The switching state of the motor (On, Off, clockwise, counter-  
clockwise, fast, slow) is derived from the current flow in the  
main circuit, so checkbacks are not required through auxiliary  
contacts from circuit-breakers and contactors  
• Current in phase 1, 2, 3 and maximum current in % of the set  
current  
• Direct-on-line and reversing starters  
1)  
• Wye-delta starters (also with direction reversal)  
• Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing  
1)  
switch); also with direction reversal  
• Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings  
3)  
• Voltage in phases 1, 2, 3 in V  
1)  
(also with direction reversal)  
3)  
• Active power in W  
1)  
• Slide control  
3)  
• Apparent power in VA  
1)  
• Solenoid valve actuation  
3)  
• Power factor in %  
• Actuation of a circuit-breaker (MCCB)  
• Phase unbalance in %  
1)  
• Actuation of a 3RW soft starter also with direction reversal  
3)  
• Phase sequence  
These control programs already include all the software  
interlocks and logic operations required for operation of the  
required motor functions.  
Temperature in sensor circuits 1, 2, 3 and maximum  
1)4)  
temperature in °C  
1)2)  
• Current values of the analog signals  
• Time until tripping in sec.  
It is also monitored whether the current checkback of the motor  
feeder corresponds with the control command. If not,  
SIMOCODE pro opens the motor contactor and generates an  
alarm indication.  
Temperature rise for motor model in %  
• Remaining cooling time of the motor in sec. etc.  
Service data  
• Motor operating hours (can be reset)  
• Motor stop times (can be reset)  
• Number of motor starts (can be reset)  
• Number of remaining permissible motor starts  
• Number of overload trips (can be reset)  
• Internal comments, stored in the device for each feeder,  
e.g. notes for maintenance events etc.  
Depending on the application, motor control can be switched  
over or carried out simultaneously from several control stations,  
e.g.:  
• From the I&C system through PROFIBUS DP  
• From a PC/PG through PROFIBUS DP  
• From the control cabinet door through the operator panel  
• From a PC/PG on the system interface through  
SIMOCODE pro  
• From a local control station on the motor. In this case, the  
buttons, switches and indicator lights are connected to the  
inputs and outputs of SIMOCODE pro.  
1) Using basic unit 2.  
2) An additional analog module is required.  
3) Using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module.  
4) An additional temperature module is required.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/12  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
Diagnostic data  
Autonomous operation  
• Numerous detailed early warning and fault messages (can  
also be used for further processing in the device or I&C  
system)  
• Internal device fault logging with time stamp  
• Value of the previous tripping current  
• Checkback error (e.g. no current flow in the main circuit  
following ON control command) etc.  
An essential feature of SIMOCODE pro is independent  
execution of all protection and control functions even if  
communication with the I&C system breaks down. If the bus or  
automation system fails, the full functionality of the feeder is  
ensured or a pre-defined response can be initiated, e.g. the  
feeder can be shut down in a controlled manner or certain  
configured control mechanisms can be performed (e.g. the  
direction of rotation can be reversed).  
Integration  
General  
OM SIMOCODE pro object manager  
(as part of SIMOCODE ES Professional)  
In addition to device function and hardware design, a great deal  
of emphasis is placed on the case of communication-capable  
controlgear on the user-friendliness of the configuration software  
and the ability of the system to be integrated easily into various  
different system configurations and process automation sys-  
tems. For this reason, the SIMOCODE pro system provides suit-  
able software tools for consistent, time-saving parameterization,  
configuration and diagnostics:  
• SIMOCODE ES for totally integrated startup and service  
• OM SIMOCODE pro object manager for total integration into  
SIMATIC S7  
• PCS 7 function block library SIMOCODE pro for total  
integration into PCS 7  
The OM SIMOCODE pro object manager is a standard  
component of SIMOCODE ES Professional. In contrast to a  
conventional GSD file, it enables SIMOCODE ES to be  
integrated into STEP 7 for convenient device parameterization.  
By installing SIMOCODE ES Professional and  
OM SIMOCODE pro on a PC/PG, which is used to configure the  
hardware of the SIMATIC S7, SIMOCODE ES Professional can  
be called directly from the hardware configuration. This allows  
easy and consistent S7 configuration.  
PCS 7 function block library for SIMOCODE pro  
The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library can be used for simple and  
easy integration of SIMOCODE pro into the SIMATIC PCS 7 V6  
process control system. The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function  
block library contains the diagnostic and driver blocks  
corresponding with the diagnostic and driver concept of  
SIMATIC PCS 7 as well as the elements (symbols and faceplate)  
required for operator control and process monitoring. The  
application is integrated by graphic interconnection using the  
CFC Editor.  
SIMOCODE ES  
The parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro can be run on  
a PC/PG under Windows 2000 or Windows XP. It is available in  
two functionally graded versions:  
SIMOCODE ES Smart, for direct connection to  
SIMOCODE pro via the system interface on the device  
(point-to-point)  
The technological and signal processing functions of the  
SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library are based on the  
SIMATIC PCS 7 standard libraries (driver blocks, technological  
blocks) and are optimally tailored to SIMOCODE pro. Users who  
previously configured motor feeder circuits using conventional  
technology by means of signal blocks and motor or valve blocks,  
can now easily switch to the SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function  
block library.  
SIMOCODE ES Professional, for connection to one or  
several devices over PROFIBUS DP or point-to-point through  
the system interface  
With SIMOCODE ES, the SIMOCODE motor management sys-  
tem provides a user-friendly and clear-cut user interface with  
which to configure, operate, monitor and test SIMOCODE pro in  
the field or from a central location. By displaying all operating,  
service and diagnostics data, SIMOCODE ES supplies impor-  
tant information on whether maintenance work is required or, in  
the event of a fault, helps to prevent faults or to localize and rec-  
tify them once they have occurred.  
The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library supplied on  
CD-ROM allows the user to run the required engineering  
software on the engineering station (single license) including the  
runtime software for executing the AS blocks in an automation  
system (single license). If the AS blocks are to be used in  
additional automation systems, the corresponding number of  
runtime licenses are required which are supplied without a data  
carrier.  
Unnecessary plant downtimes can be prevented by changing  
parameters online (even during operation). The flexible printing  
function integrated into SIMOCODE ES allows comprehensive  
documentation of all parameters or partial documentation of  
selected or changed parameters.  
System manual for SIMOCODE pro  
SIMOCODE ES Graphic is an optional software package for  
SIMOCODE ES Smart or SIMOCODE ES Professional. It  
expands the user interface with a graphical editor and  
supports extremely user-friendly parameterization with Drag &  
Drop. Inputs and outputs of function blocks can be graphically  
linked and parameters can be set. The configured functions  
can be described in greater detail using comments and the  
device parameterization can be documented graphically –  
this speeds up start-up and simplifies the plant  
The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes the motor  
management system and its functions in detail. It contains  
information about configuration and commissioning as well as  
servicing and maintenance. A typical example of a reversing  
starter application is used to teach the user quickly and  
practically how to use the system. In addition to help on how to  
identify and rectify faults in the event of a malfunction, the  
manual also contains special information for servicing and  
maintenance.  
documentation.  
Furthermore, the manual contains schematics, dimensional  
drawings and technical specifications of the system  
components as configuring aids.  
Note:  
Installation of SIMOCODE ES Graphic requires at least one  
installed version of SIMOCODE ES Smart 2004+SP1 or  
SIMOCODE ES Professional+SP1 (from April 2005) on the  
PC/PG.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/13  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
Technical specifications  
General data applicable to the basic units, current measuring  
modules, current/voltage measuring modules, expansion modules  
and operator panel  
Permissible ambient temperature  
• During operation  
°C  
°C  
-25 ... +60  
-40 ... +80  
• Storage and transport  
Installation altitude above sea level  
• Permissible ambient temperature max. +50 °C  
(no safe isolation)  
• Permissible ambient temperature max. +40 °C  
(no safe isolation)  
m
m
ˆ 2000  
ˆ 3000  
m
ˆ 4000  
Degree of protection (acc. to IEC 60529)  
• All components  
IP20  
(except for current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring  
modules for busbar connection, operator panel and door adapter)  
• Current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring module with  
busbar connection  
IP00  
IP54  
• Operator panel (front) and door adapter (front) with cover  
Shock resistance (sine pulse)  
Mounting position  
Frequency  
g/ms 15/11  
Any  
Hz  
50/60 –5 %  
Immunity to electromagnetic interferences (acc. to IEC 60947-1)  
Corresponds to degree of severity 3  
2 (power ports)  
1 (signal port)  
• Line-induced interference, burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4  
kV  
kV  
V
kV  
kV  
kV  
kV  
V/m  
• Conducted interference, high frequency acc. to IEC 61000-4-6  
• Line-induced interference, surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5  
10  
2 (line to ground)  
1 (line to line)  
8 (air discharge)  
6 (contact discharge)  
10  
• Electrostatic discharge, ESD acc. to IEC 61000-4-2  
• Field-related interference acc. to IEC 61000-4-3  
Immunity to electromagnetic interferences (acc. to IEC 60947-1)  
• Line-conducted and radiated interference emission  
EN 55011 / EN 55022 (CISPR 11 / CISPR 22)  
(corresponds to degree of severity A)  
Safe isolation (acc. to IEC 60947-1)  
All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are safely isolated from each other acc. to  
IEC 60947-1, they are designed with doubled creepage paths and  
clearances  
In this context, compliance with the instructions in the test report "Safe  
Isolation" No. 2668 is required.  
Basic units  
Mounting  
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or  
screw fixing with additional push-in lugs  
Displays  
• Red/green "DEVICE" LED  
Green: "Ready"  
Red: "Function test not OK; device is disabled"  
Off: "No control supply voltage"  
Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"  
Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communicating with PC/PG"  
Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. Overload tripping  
• Green "BUS" LED  
• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED  
Test/Reset buttons  
• Resets the device after tripping  
• Function test  
• Operation of a memory module or addressing plug  
System interfaces  
• Front  
Connection of an operator panel or expansion modules; the memory  
module, addressing plug or a PC cable can also be connected to the system  
interface for parameterizing  
Connection of a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring  
module  
• Bottom  
PROFIBUS DP interface  
Connection of the PROFIBUS DP cable over terminals or  
over a 9-pin sub D female connector  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/14  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
Basic units  
Control circuit  
Rated control supply voltage U (acc. to EN 61131-2)  
110 ... 240 V AC/DC; 50/60 Hz  
24 V DC  
s
Operating range  
0.85 ... 1.1 x U  
0.8 ... 1.2 × U  
s
s
Power input  
• Basic unit 1 (3UF7 000)  
7 VA  
10 VA  
5 W  
7 W  
• Basic unit 2 (3UF7 010)  
incl. two expansion modules connected to basic unit 2  
Rated insulation voltage U  
V
300 (at pollution degree 3)  
4
i
Rated impulse withstand voltage U  
kV  
imp  
Relay outputs  
• Number  
3 monostable relay outputs  
• Auxiliary contacts of the 3 relay outputs  
Floating NO contact (NC contact response can be parameterized with  
internal signal conditioning), 2 relay outputs are jointly and 1 relay output is  
separately connected to a common potential; they can be freely assigned to  
the control functions (e.g. for line, wye and delta contactors and for signaling  
the operating status)  
• Specified short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts  
(relay outputs)  
• Fuse links, operational class gL/gA 6 A, quick 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1)  
• Miniature circuit-breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)  
• Miniature circuit-breaker 6 A, C characteristic (I < 500 A)  
k
• Rated uninterrupted current  
• Rated short-circuit capacity  
A
6
AC-15  
DC-13  
6 A/24 V AC  
2 A/24 V DC  
6 A/120 V AC  
0.55 A/60 V DC  
3 A/230 V AC  
0.25 A/125 V DC  
Inputs (binary)  
4 inputs supplied internally by the device electronics with 24 V DC and  
connected to a common potential for acquiring process signals  
(e.g. local control station, key switch, limit switch, ...),  
freely assignable to control functions  
Thermistor motor protection (binary PTC)  
• Summation cold resistance  
• Operating value  
kW  
kW  
kW  
ˆ 1.5  
3.4 ... 3.8  
1.5 ... 1.65  
• Return value  
Conductor cross-sections  
• Tightening torque  
Nm  
mm  
mm  
0.8 ... 1.2  
1 × (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 × (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)  
2
2
• Solid  
• Finely stranded with end sleeve  
• AWG cable (solid)  
• AWG cable (finely stranded)  
AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 12/2 x AWG 20 to 14  
AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 14/2 x AWG 20 to 16  
Current measuring modules or  
current/voltage measuring modules  
Mounting  
• Set current I = 0.3 ... 3 A; 2.4 ... 25 A; 10 ... 100 A  
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or  
screw fixing with additional push-in lugs  
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail,  
screwing onto mounting plate or direct fixing on contactor  
Screw fixing onto mounting plate or direct fixing on contactor  
e
(3UF7 1.0, 3UF7 1.1, 3UF7 1.2)  
• Set current I = 20 ... 200 A (3UF7 103, 3UF7 113)  
e
• Set current I = 63 ... 630 A (3UF7 104, 3UF7 114)  
e
System interfaces  
for connection to a basic unit  
Main circuit  
3UF7 1.0  
3UF7 1.1  
3UF7 1.2  
3UF7 1.3  
3UF7 1.4  
Set current I  
A
V
0.3 ... 3  
690  
2.4 ... 25  
10 ... 100  
20 ... 200  
1000  
63 ... 630  
e
Rated insulation voltage U  
(with pollution degree 3)  
i
Rated impulse withstand voltage U  
Rated frequency  
kV  
6
8
imp  
Hz  
50/60  
Type of current  
Three-phase current  
1)  
Short-circuit  
Additional short-circuit protection is required in main circuit  
Accuracy of current measurement (in the range 1 x minimum  
%
–3  
set current I to 8 x max. set current I )  
u
o
Typical voltage measuring ranges  
• Phase-to-phase voltage/line-to-line voltage (e.g. U  
)
V
V
110 ... 690  
65 ... 400  
L1 L2  
• Phase voltage (e.g. U  
)
L1  
Accuracy  
• Of voltage measurement  
%
–3 (typical)  
(phase voltage U in the range 230 ... 400 V)  
L
• Of power factor measurement  
%
%
–5 (typical)  
–5 (typical)  
• Of apparent power measurement  
Notes on voltage measurement  
• Grounded network  
suitable for three-phase supply with grounded neutral point  
grounded mass or neutral conductor is required  
• Rated control supply voltage U  
s
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/15  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
Current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules  
Connection for main circuit  
Feed-through opening (diameter)  
• Set current I = 0.3 ... 3 A; 2.4 ... 25 A  
mm  
mm  
mm  
7.5  
14.0  
25.0  
e
• Set current I = 10 ... 100 A  
e
• Set current I = 20 ... 200 A  
e
1)  
Busbar connection  
• Set current I  
A
20 ... 200  
M8 x 25  
10 ... 14  
16 ... 95  
25 ... 120  
63 ... 630  
M10 x 30  
14 ... 24  
50 ... 240  
70 ... 240  
1/0 ... 500 kcmil  
e
• Terminal screw  
• Tightening torque  
Nm  
mm  
mm  
2
2
2)  
2)  
3)  
3)  
• Solid with cable lug  
• Stranded with cable lug  
• AWG cable  
AWG 6 ... 3/0 kcmil  
Conductor cross-sections for voltage measurement  
• Tightening torque  
Nm  
mm  
mm  
0.8 ... 1.2  
1 x (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
2
2
• Solid  
• Finely stranded with end sleeve  
• AWG cable (solid)  
• AWG cable (finely stranded)  
AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 12/2 x AWG 20 to 14  
AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 14/2 x AWG 20 to 16  
Digital modules  
Mounting  
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or  
screw fixing with additional push-in lugs  
Displays  
• Green LED "READY"  
Continuous light: "Ready"  
Flashing:  
"No connection to the PC"  
System interfaces  
for connecting to a basic unit, another expansion module, a current  
measuring module or current/voltage measuring module or to the operator  
panel  
Control circuit  
Rated insulation voltage U  
V
300 (at pollution degree 3)  
4
i
Rated impulse withstand voltage U  
kV  
imp  
Relay outputs  
• Number  
2 monostable or bistable relay outputs (depending on the variant)  
Floating NO contact (NC contact response can be parameterized with  
internal signal conditioning), all relay outputs are jointly connected to a  
common potential, they can be freely assigned to the control functions (e.g.  
for line, wye and delta contactors and for signaling the operating status)  
• Fuse links, operational class gL/gG 6 A, quick 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1)  
• Miniature circuit-breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)  
• Auxiliary contacts of the 2 relay outputs  
• Specified short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts  
(relay outputs)  
• Miniature circuit-breaker 6 A, C characteristic (I <500 A)  
k
• Rated uninterrupted current  
• Rated short-circuit capacity  
A
6
AC-15  
DC-13  
6 A/24 V AC  
2 A/24 V DC  
6 A/120 V AC  
0.55 A/60 V DC  
3 A/230 V AC  
0.25 A/125 V DC  
Inputs (binary)  
4 externally supplied floating inputs, 24 V DC or 110 to 240 V AC/DC  
depending on the variant; inputs jointly connected to common potential  
for sensing process signals (e.g.: local control station, key switch, limit  
switch ...), freely assignable to the control functions  
Conductor cross-sections  
• Tightening torque  
Nm  
mm  
mm  
0.8 ... 1.2  
1 × (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 × (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)  
2
2
• Solid  
• Finely stranded with end sleeve  
• AWG cable (solid)  
• AWG cable (finely stranded)  
AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 12/2 x AWG 20 to 14  
AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 14/2 x AWG 20 to 16  
Ground fault modules  
Mounting  
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or  
screw fixing with additional push-in lugs  
Displays  
• Green LED "READY"  
Continuous light: "Ready"  
Flashing:  
"No connection to the PC"  
System interfaces  
for connecting to a basic unit, another expansion module, a current  
measuring module or current/voltage measuring module or to the operator  
panel  
Control circuit  
Connectable 3UL22 summation current transformer with rated fault  
A
0.3/0.5/1  
currents I  
N
Ground fault  
Ground fault  
I  
I  
ˆ 50 % I  
No tripping  
Tripping  
N
N
˜ 100 % I  
Response delay  
ms  
300 ... 500, additionally delayable  
Conductor cross-sections  
• Tightening torque  
Nm  
mm  
mm  
0.8 ... 1.2  
1 × (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 × (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)  
2
2
• Solid  
• Finely stranded with end sleeve  
• AWG cable (solid)  
• AWG cable (finely stranded)  
AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 12/2 x AWG 20 to 14  
AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 14/2 x AWG 20 to 16  
1) Screw connection is possible using a suitable 3RT19 ... box terminal.  
2) When connecting cable lugs acc. to DIN 46235, use the 3RT19 56-4EA1  
3) When connecting cable lugs acc. to DIN 46234 for conductor cross-  
2
sections from 240 mm as well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections  
2
from 185 mm , use the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal cover to ensure phase  
2
terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm to ensure phase  
spacing.  
spacing.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/16  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
Temperature modules  
Mounting  
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or  
screw fixing with additional push-in lugs  
Displays  
• Green LED "READY"  
Continuous light: "Ready"  
Flashing:  
"No connection to the PC"  
System interfaces  
for connecting to a basic unit, another expansion module, a current  
measuring module or current/voltage measuring module or to the operator  
panel  
Sensor circuits  
Typical sensor circuits  
• PT100  
• PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC  
mA  
mA  
1 (typical)  
0.2 (typical)  
Wire-break/short-circuit detection  
• For sensor type  
PT100/PT1000  
KTY83-110  
KTY84  
NTC  
• Open-circuit  
--  
• Short-circuit  
• Measuring range  
°C  
K
-50 ... +500  
-50 ... +175  
-40 ... +300  
+80 ... +160  
Measuring accuracy at 20 °C ambient temperature (T20)  
< –2  
Deviation due to ambient temperature (in % of measuring range)  
%
0.05 per K deviation from T20  
Conductor cross-sections  
• Tightening torque  
Nm  
mm  
mm  
0.8 ... 1.2  
1 × (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 × (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5)  
2
2
• Solid  
• Finely stranded with end sleeve  
• AWG cable (solid)  
• AWG cable (finely stranded)  
AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 12/2 x AWG 20 to 14  
AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 14/2 x AWG 20 to 16  
Analog modules  
Mounting  
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or  
screw fixing with additional push-in lugs  
Displays  
• Green LED "READY"  
Continuous light: "Ready"  
Flashing:  
"No connection to the PC"  
System interfaces  
for connecting to a basic unit, another expansion module, a current  
measuring module or current/voltage measuring module or to the operator  
panel  
Control circuits  
Inputs  
• Channels  
2
• Parameterizable measuring ranges  
• Shielding  
• Max. input current (destruction limit)  
• Accuracy  
mA  
0/4 ... 20  
up to 30 m shield recommended, from 30 m shield required  
mA  
%
W
ms  
bit  
40  
1
• Input resistance  
• Conversion time  
• Resolution  
50  
130  
12  
• Open-circuit detection  
with measuring range 4 ... 20 mA  
Outputs  
• Channels  
1
• Parameterizable output range  
• Shielding  
mA  
0/4 ... 20  
up to 30 m shield recommended, from 30 m shield required  
• Max. voltage at output  
• Accuracy  
30 V DC  
1
500  
10  
12  
yes  
%
• Max. output load  
• Conversion time  
• Resolution  
W
ms  
bit  
• Short-circuit resistant  
Connection type  
2-wire connection  
no  
Voltage isolation of inputs/outputs to the device electronics  
Conductor cross-sections  
• Tightening torque  
Nm  
mm  
mm  
0.8 ... 1.2  
1 x (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
2
2
• Solid  
• Finely stranded with end sleeve  
• AWG cable (solid)  
• AWG cable (finely stranded)  
AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 12/2 x AWG 20 to 14  
AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 14/2 x AWG 20 to 16  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/17  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
Operator panels  
Mounting  
Mounted in a control cabinet door or in a front panel,  
IP54 with system interface cover  
Displays  
• Red/green "DEVICE" LED  
Green:  
"Ready"  
Green flashing: "No connection to the basic unit"  
Red:  
Off:  
"Function test not OK; device is disabled"  
"No control supply voltage"  
• Green "BUS" LED  
Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"  
Flashing:  
"Baud rate recognized/communicating with PC/PG"  
• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED  
• Green or yellow LEDs  
Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. Overload tripping  
for assigning to any status signals, as required  
Keys  
Test/Reset  
• Resets the device after tripping  
• Function test  
• Operation of a memory module or addressing plug  
for controlling the motor feeder, user-assignable  
• Control keys  
System interfaces  
• Front  
for plugging in a memory module, an addressing plug or  
a PC cable for parameterization  
Connection to the basic unit or to an expansion module  
• Rear  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/18  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V for 3UF7  
Current measuring  
modules or current/  
voltage measuring  
modules  
Contactors  
CLASS 5 and Class 10  
CLASS 15  
CLASS 20  
CLASS 25  
Rated operational current I /AC-3 in A at ... V  
e
Types  
400  
500  
690  
400  
500  
690  
400  
500  
690  
400  
500  
690  
Set current 0.3 ... 3.0 A  
3UF7 1 . 0-1AA00-0  
3RT10 15  
3RT10 16  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
Set current 2.4 ... 25 A  
3UF7 1 . 1-1AA00-0  
3RT10 15  
3RT10 16  
3RT10 17  
7.0  
5.0  
6.5  
9.0  
4.0  
5.2  
6.3  
7.0  
5.0  
6.5  
9.0  
4.0  
5.2  
6.3  
7.0  
5.0  
6.5  
9.0  
4.0  
5.2  
6.3  
7.0  
9.0  
9.5  
5.0  
6.5  
9.0  
4.0  
5.2  
6.3  
9.0  
9.0  
9.0  
12.0  
11.0  
10.0  
3RT10 23  
3RT10 24  
3RT10 25  
3RT10 26  
9.0  
6.5  
5.2  
9.0  
6.5  
5.2  
9.0  
6.5  
5.2  
--  
--  
--  
12.0  
17.0  
25.0  
12.0  
17.0  
18.0  
9.0  
12.0  
17.0  
18.0  
12.0  
17.0  
18.0  
9.0  
12.0  
16.0  
16.0  
12.0  
16.0  
16.0  
9.0  
12.0  
15.0  
15.0  
12.0  
15.0  
15.0  
9.0  
13.0  
13.0  
13.0  
13.0  
13.0  
13.0  
13.0  
13.0  
3RT10 34  
3RT10 35  
25.0  
25.0  
25.0  
25.0  
20.0  
24.0  
25.0  
25.0  
25.0  
25.0  
20.0  
24.0  
22.3  
25.0  
22.3  
25.0  
20.0  
24.0  
20.3  
25.0  
20.3  
25.0  
20.3  
24.0  
Set current 10 ... 100 A  
3UF7 1 . 2-1AA00-0  
3RT10 34  
3RT10 35  
3RT10 36  
32.0  
40.0  
50.0  
32.0  
40.0  
50.0  
20.0  
24.0  
24.0  
25.5  
33.0  
38.5  
25.5  
33.0  
38.5  
20.0  
24.0  
24.0  
22.3  
29.4  
32.7  
22.3  
29.4  
32.7  
20.0  
24.0  
24.0  
20.3  
28.0  
29.4  
20.3  
28.0  
29.4  
20.0  
24.0  
24.0  
3RT10 44  
3RT10 45  
3RT10 46  
65.0  
80.0  
95.0  
65.0  
80.0  
95.0  
47.0  
58.0  
58.0  
56.0  
61.0  
69.0  
56.0  
61.0  
69.0  
47.0  
58.0  
58.0  
49.0  
53.0  
59.0  
49.0  
53.0  
59.0  
47.0  
53.0  
58.0  
45.0  
47.0  
53.0  
45.0  
47.0  
53.0  
45.0  
47.0  
53.0  
3RT10 54  
3RT10 55  
100.0  
--  
100.0  
--  
100.0  
--  
93.2  
100.0  
93.2  
100.0  
93.2  
100.0  
81.7  
100.0  
81.7  
100.0  
81.7  
100.0  
74.8  
97.5  
74.8  
97.5  
74.8  
97.5  
Set current 20 ... 200 A  
3UF7 1 . 3-1 . A00-0  
3RT10 54  
3RT10 55  
3RT10 56  
115  
150  
185  
115  
150  
185  
115  
150  
170  
93.2  
122  
150  
93.2  
122  
150  
93.2  
122  
150  
81.7  
107  
131  
81.7  
107  
131  
81.7  
107  
131  
74.8  
98  
120  
74.8  
98  
120  
74.8  
98  
120  
Set current 63 ... 630 A  
3UF7 1 . 4-1BA00-0  
3RT10 64  
3RT10 65  
3RT10 66  
225  
265  
300  
225  
265  
300  
225  
265  
280  
182  
215  
243  
182  
215  
243  
182  
215  
243  
160  
188  
213  
160  
188  
213  
160  
188  
213  
146  
172  
195  
146  
172  
195  
146  
172  
195  
3RT10 75  
3RT10 76  
400  
500  
400  
500  
400  
450  
324  
405  
324  
405  
324  
405  
284  
355  
284  
355  
284  
355  
260  
325  
260  
325  
260  
325  
3RT12 64  
3RT12 65  
3RT12 66  
225  
265  
300  
225  
265  
300  
225  
265  
300  
225  
265  
300  
225  
265  
300  
225  
265  
300  
225  
265  
300  
225  
265  
300  
225  
265  
300  
194  
228  
258  
194  
228  
258  
194  
228  
258  
3RT12 75  
3RT12 76  
400  
500  
400  
500  
400  
500  
400  
500  
400  
500  
400  
500  
400  
500  
400  
500  
400  
500  
344  
430  
344  
430  
344  
430  
1)  
3TF68  
630  
630  
630  
630  
630  
630  
502  
630  
502  
630  
502  
630  
440  
572  
440  
572  
440  
572  
408  
531  
408  
531  
408  
531  
1)  
3TF69  
1) Contactor cannot be mounted.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/19  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
1)  
Current measuring  
modules or current/  
voltage measuring  
modules  
Contactors  
CLASS 30  
CLASS 35  
CLASS 40  
Fuse links  
LV HRC type 3NA  
DIAZED type 5SB  
NEOZED type 5SE  
Operational class gL(gG)  
2)  
Types of coordination  
Rated operational current I /AC-3 in A at ... V  
1
2
e
Types  
400 V  
500 V  
690 V  
400 V  
500 V  
690 V  
400 V  
500 V  
690 V  
690 V  
690 V  
Set current 0.3 ... 3.0 A  
3UF7 1 . 0-1AA00-0  
3RT10 15  
3RT10 16  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
35  
35  
20  
20  
Set current 2.4 ... 25 A  
3UF7 1 . 1-1AA00-0  
3RT10 15  
3RT10 16  
3RT10 17  
7.0  
9.0  
9.0  
5.0  
6.5  
9.0  
4.0  
5.2  
6.3  
7.0  
9.0  
9.0  
5.0  
6.5  
9.0  
4.0  
5.2  
6.3  
7.0  
8.5  
8.5  
5.0  
6.5  
8.5  
4.0  
5.2  
6.3  
35  
35  
35  
20  
20  
20  
3RT10 23  
3RT10 24  
3RT10 25  
3RT10 26  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
63  
25  
25  
25  
35  
12.0  
14.0  
14.0  
12.0  
14.0  
14.0  
9.0  
13.0  
13.0  
12.0  
13.0  
13.0  
12.0  
13.0  
13.0  
9.0  
13.0  
13.0  
12.0  
12.0  
12.0  
12.0  
12.0  
12.0  
9.0  
12.0  
12.0  
63  
63  
100  
3RT10 34  
3RT10 35  
19.1  
25.0  
19.1  
25.0  
19.1  
24.0  
17.6  
25.0  
17.6  
25.0  
17.6  
24.0  
16.1  
23.5  
16.1  
23.5  
16.1  
23.5  
125  
125  
63  
63  
Set current 10 ... 100 A  
3UF7 1 . 2-1AA00-0  
3RT10 34  
3RT10 35  
3RT10 36  
19.1  
26.5  
26.5  
19.1  
26.5  
26.5  
19.1  
24.0  
24.0  
17.6  
25.0  
25.0  
17.6  
25.0  
25.0  
17.6  
24.0  
24.0  
16.1  
23.5  
23.5  
16.1  
23.5  
23.5  
16.1  
23.5  
23.5  
125  
125  
160  
63  
63  
80  
3RT10 44  
3RT10 45  
3RT10 46  
41.7  
45.0  
50.0  
41.7  
45.0  
50.0  
41.7  
45.0  
50.0  
38.2  
43.0  
47.0  
38.2  
43.0  
47.0  
38.2  
43.0  
47.0  
34.5  
40.0  
44.0  
34.5  
40.0  
44.0  
34.5  
40.0  
44.0  
200  
200  
200  
125  
160  
160  
3RT10 54  
3RT10 55  
69.0  
90.0  
69.0  
90.0  
69.0  
90.0  
63.0  
82.0  
63.0  
82.0  
63.0  
82.0  
57.0  
74.0  
57.0  
74.0  
57.0  
74.0  
355  
355  
315  
315  
Set current 20 ... 200 A  
3UF7 1 . 3-1 . A00-0  
3RT10 54  
3RT10 55  
3RT10 56  
69.0  
90  
111  
69.0  
90  
111  
69.0  
90  
111  
64.0  
82  
102  
64.0  
82  
102  
64.0  
82  
102  
--  
74  
93  
--  
74  
93  
--  
74  
93  
355  
355  
355  
315  
315  
315  
Set current 63 ... 630 A  
3UF7 1 . 4-1BA00-0  
3RT10 64  
3RT10 65  
3RT10 66  
135  
159  
180  
135  
159  
180  
135  
159  
180  
126  
146  
165  
126  
146  
165  
126  
146  
165  
--  
133  
150  
--  
133  
150  
--  
133  
150  
500  
500  
500  
400  
400  
400  
3RT10 75  
3RT10 76  
240  
300  
240  
300  
240  
300  
220  
275  
220  
275  
220  
275  
200  
250  
200  
250  
200  
250  
630  
630  
400  
500  
3RT12 64  
3RT12 65  
3RT12 66  
173  
204  
231  
173  
204  
231  
173  
204  
231  
152  
180  
204  
152  
180  
204  
152  
180  
204  
131  
156  
177  
131  
156  
177  
131  
156  
177  
500  
500  
500  
500  
500  
500  
3RT12 75  
3RT12 76  
316  
385  
316  
385  
316  
385  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
800  
800  
800  
800  
340  
340  
340  
316  
316  
316  
3)  
4)  
4)  
3TF68  
376  
500  
376  
500  
376  
500  
344  
469  
344  
469  
344  
469  
317  
438  
317  
438  
317  
438  
800  
800  
500  
630  
3)  
3TF69  
1) Note the operational voltage.  
2) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices  
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1.  
Type of coordination "1": Contactors or starters must not endanger  
persons or equipment in the event of a short-circuit. They do not have to  
be suitable for further operation without repair and the renewal of parts.  
Type of coordination "2": Contactors or starters must not endanger  
persons or equipment in the event of a short-circuit and must be suitable  
for continued use. There is a risk of contact welding.  
3) Contactor cannot be mounted.  
4) Please ensure that the maximum AC-3 operational current has a sufficient  
safety clearance from the rated fuse current.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/20  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
Dimension drawings  
Basic unit 1, SIMOCODE pro C, 3UF7 000  
Basic unit 2, SIMOCODE pro V, 3UF7 010  
4
5
5
6
5
4
5
5
3
6
4
4
1
1
5
8
6
3UF7 100, 3UF7 101 current measuring module (straight-through  
transformer)  
3UF7 102 current measuring module (straight-through transformer)  
5
5
5
6
7
4
0
4
5
5
1
4
7
,
5
T
3
T
1
T
1
T
2
T
3
T
2
3UF7 103 current measuring module (straight-through transformer)  
1
2
0
9
5
1
4
0
7
5
2
5
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/21  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
3UF7 103 current measuring module (busbar connection)  
1
2
0
9
5
1
7
3
7
9
7
5
4
7
1
4
0
3UF7 104 current measuring module (busbar connection)  
1
4
5
5
0
2
5
1
1
1
2
5
9
6
0
,
5
6
1
4
8
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/22  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
3UF7 110, 3UF7 111 current/voltage measuring module  
(straight-through transformer)  
3UF7 112 current/voltage measuring module  
(straight-through transformer)  
5
5
5
6
0
4
5
5
3
1
9
2
2
1
6
6
2
0
T
3
T
3
T
1
T
2
T
1
T
2
3UF7 113 current/voltage measuring module (straight-through transformer)  
1
2
0
9
5
5
7
3
7
1
4
0
2
5
3
6
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/23  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
3UF7 113 current/voltage measuring module (busbar connection)  
1
2
0
9
5
1
7
7
9
3
7
9
7
5
4
7
1
4
0
3UF7 114 current/voltage measuring module (busbar connection)  
145  
48  
25  
11  
9
125  
67  
149  
3UF7 200 operator panel  
N
S
A
0
_
0
0
3
8
5
2
9
7
8
9
6
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/24  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7  
motor management and control devices  
3UF7 920 door adapter  
3UF7 3 digital modules  
3UF7 4 analog module  
3UF7 5 ground fault module  
3UF7 7 temperature module  
N
S
A
0
_
0
0
3
8
6
1
7
3
9
2
2
,
5
5
1
1
5
4
Schematics  
Reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro  
3/N/PE AC 50Hz 400V  
1/N AC 50Hz 230V  
1/N AC 50Hz 230V  
L1  
L2  
L3  
2L1  
2N  
1L1  
1N  
PROFIBUS  
A B  
B
A
N
PE  
PE  
/.2  
20  
1819  
3
1
4
1
2
2
4
1
2
3
6
-X1  
-X19  
-F11  
-F12  
1
-Q1  
>
>
>
>
>
3
1
C 1A  
C 1,6A  
5
SPE  
/PE  
A
A2  
230 V AC  
B
A1  
-A10 X9  
1
3
6
7
-A12  
L3  
L2  
PROFIBUS DP  
L1  
T1  
TEST  
ON<  
ON>  
OFF  
-T10  
Device  
BUS  
RESET  
SIMOCODE pro C/V  
Basic unit  
Gen. fault  
DEVICE  
BUS  
GEN.FAULT  
Test/Reset  
IN4  
BU  
PTC  
0UT1  
0UT2  
0UT3  
24V  
Operator panel  
IN1  
IN2  
IN3  
10  
T2 T3  
T1 T2  
9
4
5
8
2
<2>  
<1>  
3
4
1
5
3
1
2
5
6
A1  
A2  
A1  
A2  
-K1  
/.4  
-K2  
/.4  
-K2  
<2>  
-K1  
<1>  
2
4
6
4
3
6
1
10  
6
7
5
11  
13  
9
-X1  
-X19  
12  
21  
8
NSA0_00420  
<1> Main contactor Clockwise  
2
<2> Main contactor Counterclockwise  
-X2  
<3> Local OFF  
<4> Local Clockwise  
<5> Local Counterclockwise  
13  
14  
-S11  
-S13  
22  
-S12  
14  
<1>  
PE /.2  
U
W
PE  
V
<4>  
<3>  
<5>  
-M1  
M
3 AC  
Circuit diagrams for additional control functions can be referred to in the SIMOCODE pro system manual.  
More information  
System manual  
Internet  
For selection of equipment and for planning, it is recommended  
that the 3UF7 970-0AA0.-0 system manual is consulted.  
You can find more information on the Internet at:  
http://www.siemens.com/simocode  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/25  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5  
motor protection and control devices  
Expansion module  
Overview  
3
1
1
2
$ PC/system interface  
% Four relay outputs, floating  
& Eight inputs (24 V, 115 V, 230 V)  
Front view of expansion module  
Operator panel  
4
5
SIEMENS  
Ready  
1
Gen. Fault  
SIMOCODE-DP basic unit, expansion module and operator module  
3
SIMOCODE-DP is the predecessor of the SIMOCODE pro motor  
management system and offers the solution for a wide range of  
different tasks in a single unit:  
NSA0_00143a  
1
2
2
• Multifunctional, electronic motor protection and plant  
monitoring  
• Comprehensive motor and plant diagnostics  
• Integrated control programs (instead of extensive hardware  
wiring)  
• Open communication through PROFIBUS DP, the standard  
for fieldbus systems  
$ Eight LEDs  
% Labeling strips  
& Test/reset button for device test or manual reset  
( Three control keys  
) PC/system interface, with cover  
Front view of operator panel  
Design  
Safe isolation  
The SIMOCODE-DP system hardware comprises:  
• Basic unit  
• Expansion module (optional)  
• Operator panel (optional)  
All electric circuits in SIMOCODE-DP (from product version 12,  
start of delivery 01/2000) are safely isolated from each other. The  
instructions of test report No. 1610a must be complied with.  
Basic unit  
Connection and mounting  
Devices with current adjustment ranges from 1.25 to 100 A  
(overall width 70 mm) are designed for stand-alone installation  
due to the straight-through current transformer, i.e. they are  
either snapped onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail or screwed  
onto a mounting plate using push-in lugs that are available as  
accessories.  
1
2
6
7
SIEMENS  
Ready  
Bus  
3
4
Gen. Fault  
The main conductors are simply passed through the straight-  
through current transformer integrated into the enclosure, using  
multiple loops, loads with rated motor currents of less than  
1.25 A can also be protected.  
8
5
With current adjustment ranges greater than 100 A to 820 A  
(width: 120 mm, 145 mm and 230 mm), the devices can be  
directly fitted to the contactor using the connecting rails of the  
current transformer.  
$ Connection of thermistor of summation transformer  
% Connection of control supply voltage  
& Three LEDs  
( Test/reset button for device test or manual reset  
) Four relay outputs, floating  
* Four inputs (24 V)  
+ PC/system interface  
, PROFIBUS DP interface  
A screw fastening for these devices is integrated in the  
enclosure.  
Front view of the basic unit  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/26  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5  
motor protection and control devices  
Function  
Protective and monitoring functions  
Ground-fault monitoring  
For the protection of loads against impermissible high  
temperature rises  
Two qualitatively different ground-fault monitoring functions are  
offered:  
"Internal" ground-fault monitoring by means of calculation  
The internal ground-fault monitoring is only suitable for motors  
with 3-wire connection and for networks that are grounded  
directly or with a low impedance. In this case, the ground-fault  
current is calculated by vector addition of the phase currents  
of the SIMOCODE-DP current transformer. An additional  
summation current transformer is not necessary. In fault-free  
systems, the vectorial summation current of the three phases  
is zero; if this is not the case, a ground-fault is signaled.  
Ground-fault currents that are more than 30 % of the operating  
Types of overload protection:  
Current-sensitive, electronic overload protection with  
adjustable tripping characteristics (class times)  
SIMOCODE-DP protects three-phase or AC motors from  
overloading according to the requirements of IEC 60947-4-1.  
The class (trip class) indicates the maximum tripping time  
during which SIMOCODE-DP must trip at 7.2 times the  
operational current from cold. The trip class can be set in six  
stages from Class 5 to Class 30. The break time can therefore  
be extremely finely adjusted to the load torque of the motor –  
to optimize utilization of the motor (see also the section  
Characteristic Curves).  
current I are detected.  
e
"Internal" ground-fault monitoring by means of measurement  
The external ground-fault detection is normally used in supply  
systems that have a high impedance ground. An additional  
summation current transformer (3UL2 20.-.A) is required for  
this method that is also suitable for extremely low ground-fault  
currents. Detected fault current, depending on the summation  
current transformer: 0.3/0.5/1 A.  
Phase failure/unbalance monitoring  
A signal is output for a phase unbalance greater than 40 %.  
The tripping times of the overload characteristic are reduced,  
because the heat generated in the motor rises under  
unbalanced conditions (additional eddy-current losses).  
Thermistor motor protection  
Temperature-dependent motor protection is based on direct  
temperature measurements in the motor. These protective  
functions should be used, in particular, in motors with high  
operating frequencies, heavy-duty starting, intermittent and/or  
braking operation, but also in the case of a blocked air supply  
or speeds lower than the rated speed. For this reason, a wide  
range of different temperature sensors are available that are  
installed in the stator winding or in the motor enclosure.  
SIMOCODE-DP can evaluate the following sensor types:  
- Binary PTC sensors whose resistance rises sharply when the  
temperature limit is reached  
Current limit monitoring I>, I<  
Current limit monitoring is not used for motor protection, but for  
process monitoring.  
It is used to detect developing irregularities in the plant early,  
e.g. motor bearings becoming tight (consequence: upper limit  
responds) or the belt coupling to the drive machine tears  
(consequence: lower limit responds).  
Comprehensive motor and plant diagnostics  
- Analog temperature sensors, such as NTC, KTY83/84, which  
have an almost linear characteristic curve and can therefore  
be set to any warning or switch-off temperatures  
SIMOCODE-DP provides a variety of measuring, operating and  
diagnostics data concerning the load feeder:  
Up-to-date information during operation, e.g.:  
- The currently flowing phase current in %  
- The switching state of the motor (On, Off, clockwise,  
counterclockwise, fast, slow) derived from the current flow  
- Manual/automatic mode  
EEx e type of protection  
The SIMOCODE-DP system is in compliance with the regulations  
for overload protection of explosion-protected motors of the  
EEx e "Increased safety" type of protection according to  
- Test mode  
- Cooling time activated after an overload tripping operation  
• EN 50019  
Detection of incipient faults, e.g.:  
- Overload warning  
• EN 60079-7, IEC 60079-7  
• EN 60079-14 (potentially explosive areas)  
• EN 50281 (areas with combustible dust)  
• ATEX/PTB test regulations  
- Current limit overshoot  
- Phase unbalance  
- Thermistor warning  
Rapid diagnostics in the event of an alarm, e.g.:  
- Overload  
In the case of SIMOCODE-DP units with 24 V DC control infeed,  
isolation by battery or safety transformer according to  
EN 61558-2-6 must be assured.  
- Thermistor motor protection  
- Rotor locking  
EC type test certificate: PTB01 ATEX 3219  
Test report: PTB EX 01-30013  
- Current limit overshoot  
- Checkback error (e.g. no current following On command)  
Preventive maintenance by means of statistical data, e.g.:  
- Number of starts  
- Number of overload trips  
- Tripping currents  
- Operating hours  
Rotor locking protection  
When the motor current rises above a rotor locking threshold that  
can be set, SIMOCODE-DP does not trip according to the  
overload characteristic, but switches off immediately instead.  
The prevention of unnecessary thermal loads prevents  
premature aging of the motor. The rotor locking protection is not  
active for start-up monitoring until the class time has elapsed,  
e.g. for Class 10 after 10 seconds.  
Integrated standard programs for motor control  
In SIMOCODE-DP, a number of different opportunities for  
controlling the motor has been predefined and can be called up  
in the form of control functions:  
• Overload relay  
• Direct-on-line starter  
• Reversing starter  
• Wye-delta starter  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/27  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5  
motor protection and control devices  
• Two speeds, Dahlander winding  
• Two speeds, separate winding  
• Valve  
• Actuator  
• Soft starter (3RW)  
Furthermore, special standard function blocks are stored in  
SIMOCODE-DP:  
Automatic, time-discrete reactivation of motors following  
mains failure  
The prerequisites are as follows:  
- Failure of the three-phase supply must take place through a  
separate voltage relay  
These control programs already include all the software  
interlocks and logic operations required for operation of the  
required motor functions.  
- The supply voltage of SIMOCODE-DP must not be  
interrupted  
Different error signaling modules with and without  
acknowledgement  
These allow SIMOCODE-DP to trip as a result of external  
events (e.g. overspeed monitor has tripped)  
It is also monitored whether the current checkback of the motor  
feeder corresponds with the control command. If not,  
SIMOCODE-DP opens the motor contactor and generates an  
alarm indication.  
The emergency start function  
The motor can be controlled by any equipment depending on  
the application:  
• From the process control system or the PC through  
PROFIBUS DP  
• From the control cabinet door through the operator panel  
• From a local control point on the motor, whereby the  
pushbuttons/switches are wired to the SIMOCODE-DP inputs  
This resets the thermal memory of SIMOCODE-DP  
immediately after overload tripping, i.e. immediate restarting  
is possible (important, for example, for a fire-extinguisher  
pump)  
The test function for the load feeder  
This can be activated by switching off the main switch Q1 (see  
the section Schematics) and allows the control circuit to be  
checked with the motor branch at zero current.  
The standard control functions can also be adapted to each  
customized variant of a motor feeder by means of freely-  
parameterizable elements, such as timers, counters, logic  
operations (AND, OR, NOR, etc.).  
Integration  
The SIMOCODE-DP modular system offers a wide range of  
software packages for system-wide and time-saving  
configuration and diagnostics:  
• PC software Win-SIMOCODE-DP for start-up and service  
• Object manager OM-SIMOCODE for "totally integrated" in  
SIMATIC S7  
Using the OM-SIMOCODE-DP object manager  
i.e. SIMOCODE-DP becomes an integral component of  
STEP 7; the OM-SIMOCODE-DP object manager should, in  
this case, always be combined with the start-up and service  
software Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Professional  
Both software packages must be installed on the PG/PC on  
which the hardware configuration of SIMATIC S7 is performed.  
This ensures that Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Professional can be  
called up directly from HW-Config.  
• Function block FB-SIMOCODE for "totally integrated" in PCS7  
PC software Win-SIMOCODE-DP for start-up and service  
Parameter sets created with Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Professional  
are loaded into the STEP 7 data storage by means of OM and  
automatically transferred to SIMOCODE-DP during start-up.  
Standard PC software Win-SIMOCODE-DP for start-up and  
service. It offers a user-friendly and convenient user-interface  
for:  
• Parameterization  
• Display and diagnostics  
Test functions  
Functions specific to SIMATIC S7, such as diagnostic and  
hardware interrupts are supported, which means easier S7-wide  
configuration as well as optimal performance in the transfer of  
diagnostic data.  
• Motor control  
Win-SIMOCODE-DP is available in two versions:  
Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Smart  
for direct connection to SIMOCODE-DP through the system  
interface on the device  
Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Professional  
for direct connection to SIMOCODE-DP over PROFIBUS or  
directly through the system interface on the device  
Function block FB-SIMOCODE for "totally integrated" in  
PCS7  
With PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP it is easy and convenient to  
integrate SIMOCODE-DP into the SIMATIC PCS 7 process  
control system. PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP contains the  
diagnostic and driver blocks corresponding with the diagnostic  
and driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7 as well as the elements  
(symbols and faceplate) required for operator control and  
process monitoring. The application is integrated by graphic  
interconnection using the CFC Editor. The technological and  
signal processing functions of the PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP are  
based on the SIMATIC PCS 7 standard libraries (driver blocks,  
technological blocks) and are optimally tailored to SIMOCODE-  
DP. Users who previously configured motor feeder circuits using  
conventional technology by means of signal blocks and motor or  
valve blocks, can now easily switch to PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP.  
The PCS7-FB SIMOCODE-DP supplied on CD-ROM allows the  
user to run the required engineering software on one  
OM-SIMOCODE object manager for "totally integrated" in  
SIMATIC S7  
SIMOCODE-DP can be integrated into SIMATIC S7 in two  
different ways:  
Conventionally using GSD files  
i.e. integration in SIMATIC S7 is identical to integration in any  
other DP standard master system  
engineering station (single license) including the runtime  
software for executing the AS blocks in an automation system  
(single license).  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/28  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5  
motor protection and control devices  
Technical specifications  
Shared data of basic units/expansion units/  
expansion modules/operator panels  
Permissible ambient temperature  
Permissible storage temperature  
Installation altitude above sea level  
Degree of protection (acc. to IEC 60529)  
°C  
°C  
m
-25 ... +60  
-40 ... +80  
ˆ 2000  
IP20 max. set current I ˆ 100 A;  
IP00 max. set current I > 100 A  
e
e
Shock resistance (sine pulse)  
Mounting position  
Mounting  
g/ms  
10/5  
Any  
• Max. set current I ˆ 100 A  
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or  
screw fixing with push-in lugs  
e
• Max. set current I > 100 A  
Screw fixing directly onto contactor or screw fixing  
e
EMC interference immunity  
• Conducted interference, burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4  
• Conducted interference, surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5  
• Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 61000-4-2  
• Field-related interference acc. to IEC 61000-4-3  
kV  
kV  
kV  
V/m  
2 (corresponds to degree of severity 3)  
2 (corresponds to degree of severity 3)  
8 (corresponds to degree of severity 3)  
10 (corresponds to degree of severity 3)  
EMC interference emission  
Limit class B acc. to EN 55011 (VDE 0875 Part 11)  
Safe isolation  
(product version 12 upwards, start of delivery 01/2000)  
All electric circuits in SIMOCODE-DP are safely isolated from each other,  
i.e. they are designed with double leakage paths and clearances  
Power circuit from the control/electronic circuits:  
Safe isolation up to 690 V or 1000 V between control and electronic circuits  
One below the other: Safe isolation up to 300 V  
Observe notes of test report "Safe Isolation" No. 1610a.  
Basic units  
Displays  
• Green "Ready" LED  
Continuous light: "Ready"  
Off: "No control supply voltage" or "Function test not OK; device is disabled"  
• Green "BUS" LED  
Continuous light: "Bus operation"  
• Red "General Fault" LED  
Continuous light/blinklight: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping  
Test/Reset buttons  
By pressing the Test/Reset button, the device can be reset following a trip or its  
functions can be tested  
System interfaces  
RS 232 for connecting the expansion module, operator panel or PC  
PROFIBUS DP interface  
RS 485 for connecting the PROFIBUS DP line using terminals (conductor cross-  
sections as for auxiliary contacts) or 9-pole SUB D socket  
Main circuits  
Rated insulation voltage U  
(with pollution degree 3)  
i
• For uninsulated conductors (3UF5 001 to 3UF5 021)  
• For insulated conductors (3UF5 001 to 3UF5 021)  
• For uninsulated and insulated conductors  
(3UF5 031 to 3UF5 051)  
V
V
V
690  
1000  
1000  
Rated impulse withstand voltage U  
• 3UF5 001 to 3UF5 021  
• 3UF5 031 to 3UF5 051  
imp  
kV  
kV  
6
8
Rated frequency  
Hz  
50/60  
Type of current  
Three-phase current  
Short-circuit protection  
See table Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders, page 7/31  
Diameters of feed-through openings  
(max. I = 100 A)  
e
• Devices with max. set current I ˆ 25 A  
mm  
mm  
10  
15  
e
• Devices with max. set current I ˆ 100 A  
e
• Devices with max. set current I > 100 A  
Design with connecting bars  
e
Busbar connections  
• Current range  
A
50 ... 205  
125 ... 500  
200 ... 820  
• Tightening torque  
Nm  
M 8: 10 ... 14  
M 10: 14 ... 24  
M 10: 14 ... 24  
M 12: 20 ... 35  
50 ... 240  
70 ... 240  
2
• Finely stranded with cable lug  
• Stranded with cable lug  
mm  
mm  
35 ... 95  
50 ... 120  
50 ... 240  
70 ... 240  
2
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/29  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5  
motor protection and control devices  
Auxiliary circuits/control circuits  
Rated control supply voltage U  
Operating range  
AC 50/60 Hz; 115 V and 230 V  
24 V DC  
s
AC 50/60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x U  
AC 50/60 Hz; 5 VA  
300 (at pollution degree 3)  
4
24 V DC; 0.85 ... 1.2 ™ U  
24 V DC; 5 W  
s
s
Power input  
Rated insulation voltage U  
V
i
Rated impulse withstand voltage U  
kV  
imp  
Outputs  
• Number  
4 monostable/bistable outputs depending on the variant  
• Auxiliary contacts of the 4 outputs  
NC contact response can be parameterized by means of internal signal  
conditioning; 3 outputs jointly and 1 separately connected to common potential; they  
can be freely assigned to the control functions (e.g. for activating mains, wye and  
delta contactors and signaling the operating status)  
• Specified short-circuit protection  
for auxiliary contacts (outputs)  
Fuse links, gL/gA operational class 6 A, quick 10 A; circuit-breaker 1.6 A,  
C characteristic  
Rated uninterrupted current  
A
5
Rated operational current  
(switching capacity)  
AC-15; 6 A/24 V; 6 A/120 V; 3 A/230 V  
DC-13; 2 A/24 V; 0.55 A/60 V; 0.25 A/125 V  
Inputs  
4 inputs, supplied by the device electronics (24 V DC), jointly connected to a  
common potential, for injecting process signals such as local control points, key-  
operated switches or limit switches  
Thermistor motor protection  
(binary PTC thermistor)  
• Summation cold resistance  
• Operating value  
• Return value  
kW  
kW  
kW  
1.5  
2.7 ... 3.1  
1.5 ... 1.65  
Conductor cross-sections  
• Tightening torque  
• Solid and stranded  
Nm  
mm  
mm  
0.8 ... 1.2  
1 ™ (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 ™ (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 ™ (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 ™ (0.5 ... 1.5)  
2
2
• Finely stranded with or without end sleeve  
Expansion modules  
System interfaces  
RS 232 as connection to the basic unit and for connecting the operator panel or PC  
Rated insulation voltage U  
V
300 (at pollution degree 3)  
4
i
Rated impulse withstand voltage U  
kV  
imp  
Outputs  
• Number  
4 bistable outputs  
• Auxiliary contacts of the 4 outputs  
Each with 1 floating NO contact, NC contact response can be parameterized with  
internal signal conditioning, 3 outputs are jointly and 1 is separately connected to a  
common potential; they can be freely assigned to the control functions (e.g. for  
activating mains, wye and delta contactors and for signaling the operating status)  
• Specified short-circuit protection  
for auxiliary contacts (outputs)  
Fuse links, operational class gL/gA 6 A, quick 10 A;  
circuit-breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic  
Rated uninterrupted current  
A
5
Rated operational current  
(switching capacity)  
AC-15; 6 A/24 V; 6 A/120 V; 3 A/230 V  
DC-13; 2 A/24 V; 0.55 A/60 V; 0.25 A/125 V  
Inputs  
8 externally supplied with 24 V DC, 115 V AC or 230 V AC depending on the variant,  
jointly connected to a common potential, for injecting process signals such as local  
control points, key-operated switches or limit switches  
Conductor cross-sections  
• Tightening torque  
• Solid and stranded  
Nm  
mm  
mm  
0.8 ... 1.2  
1 ™ (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 ™ (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 ™ (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 ™ (0.5 ... 1.5)  
2
2
• Finely stranded with or without end sleeve  
Operator panels  
Displays  
• Green "Ready" LED  
Continuous light: "Ready"  
Off: "No control supply voltage" or "Function test not OK; device is disabled"  
• Red "General Fault" LED  
• 3 green and 3 yellow LEDs  
Continuous light/blinklight: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping  
Feeder-specific displays, freely-assignable, e.g. manual/automatic mode, tripping of  
thermistor protection, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation etc.  
Keys  
• Test/Reset  
by pressing the Test/Reset button, the device can be reset following a trip or its  
functions can be tested  
• Control keys  
for controlling the motor feeder, freely programmable  
System interfaces  
RS 232 as connection to the basic unit, to the expansion module and for connection  
to PC  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/30  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5  
motor protection and control devices  
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders  
with short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 690 V for 3RB1 2 and 3UF5 0, Part 1  
Contactors Class 5 and 10  
Class 15  
Class 20  
Class 25  
Class 30  
Basic  
units  
Rated operational current I AC-3 in A at ... V  
e
400  
500  
690  
400  
500  
690  
400  
500  
690  
400  
500  
690  
400  
500  
690  
Setting range 1.25 ... 6.3 A  
3UF5 00  
3RT1 015  
3RT1 016  
3RT1 017  
6.3  
6.3  
6.3  
5.0  
6.3  
6.3  
4.0  
5.2  
6.3  
6.3  
6.3  
6.3  
5.0  
6.3  
6.3  
4.0  
5.2  
6.3  
6.3  
6.3  
6.3  
5.0  
6.3  
6.3  
4.0  
5.2  
6.3  
6.3  
6.3  
6.3  
5.0  
6.3  
6.3  
4.0  
5.2  
6.3  
6.3  
6.3  
6.3  
5.0  
6.3  
6.3  
4.0  
5.2  
6.3  
Setting range 6.3 ... 25 A  
3UF5 01  
3RT1 015  
3RT1 016  
3RT1 017  
3RT1 024  
3RT1 025  
3RT1 026  
3RT1 034  
3RT1 035  
7.0  
7.0  
7.0  
7.0  
7.0  
9.0  
6.5  
9.0  
6.5  
9.0  
6.5  
9.0  
6.5  
9.0  
6.5  
12.0  
12.0  
17.0  
25.0  
25.0  
25.0  
9.0  
6.3  
11.0  
12.0  
17.0  
18.0  
25.0  
25.0  
9.0  
6.3  
10.0  
12.0  
16.0  
16.0  
22.3  
25.0  
9.0  
6.3  
9.5  
9.0  
6.3  
9.0  
9.0  
6.3  
12.0  
17.0  
18.0  
25.0  
25.0  
9.0  
12.0  
17.0  
18.0  
25.0  
25.0  
9.0  
12.0  
16.0  
16.0  
22.3  
25.0  
9.0  
12.0  
15.0  
15.0  
20.3  
25.0  
12.0  
15.0  
15.0  
20.3  
25.0  
9.0  
12.0  
14.0  
14.0  
19.1  
25.0  
12.0  
14.0  
14.0  
19.1  
25.0  
9.0  
13.0  
13.0  
20.0  
24.0  
13.0  
13.0  
20.0  
24.0  
13.0  
13.0  
20.0  
24.0  
13.0  
13.0  
20.3  
24.0  
13.0  
13.0  
19.1  
24.0  
Setting range 25 ... 100 A  
3UF5 02  
3RT1 034  
3RT1 035  
3RT1 036  
3RT1 044  
3RT1 045  
3RT1 046  
32.0  
40.0  
50.0  
65.0  
80  
32.0  
40.0  
50.0  
65.0  
80  
20.0  
24.0  
24.0  
47.0  
58  
25.5  
33.0  
38.5  
56.0  
61  
25.5  
33.0  
38.5  
56.0  
61  
20.0  
24.0  
24.0  
47.0  
58  
22.3  
29.4  
32.7  
49.0  
53  
22.3  
29.4  
32.7  
49.0  
53  
20.0  
24.0  
24.0  
47.0  
53  
20.3  
28.0  
29.4  
45.0  
47  
20.3  
28.0  
29.4  
45.0  
47  
20.0  
24.0  
24.0  
45.0  
47  
19.1  
26.5  
26.5  
41.7  
45  
19.1  
26.5  
26.5  
41.7  
45  
19.1  
24.0  
24.0  
41.7  
45  
95  
95  
58  
69  
69  
58  
59  
59  
58  
53  
53  
53  
50  
50  
50  
Setting range 50 ... 205 A  
3UF5 03  
3RT1 054  
3RT1 055  
3RT1 056  
115  
150  
185  
115  
150  
185  
115  
150  
170  
93  
93  
93  
82  
82  
82  
75  
75  
75  
69  
69  
69  
122  
150  
122  
150  
122  
150  
107  
131  
107  
131  
107  
131  
98  
98  
98  
90  
90  
90  
120  
120  
120  
111  
111  
111  
Setting range 125 ... 500 A  
3UF5 04  
3RT1 064  
3RT1 065  
3RT1 066  
3RT1 075  
3RT1 076  
3RT1 264  
3RT1 265  
3RT1 266  
3RT1 275  
3RT1 276  
225  
265  
300  
400  
500  
225  
265  
300  
400  
500  
225  
265  
300  
400  
500  
225  
265  
300  
400  
500  
225  
265  
280  
400  
450  
225  
265  
300  
400  
500  
182  
215  
243  
324  
405  
225  
265  
300  
400  
500  
182  
215  
243  
324  
405  
225  
265  
300  
400  
500  
182  
215  
243  
324  
405  
225  
265  
300  
400  
500  
160  
188  
213  
284  
355  
225  
265  
300  
400  
500  
160  
188  
213  
284  
355  
225  
265  
300  
400  
500  
160  
188  
213  
284  
355  
225  
265  
300  
400  
500  
146  
172  
195  
260  
325  
194  
228  
258  
344  
430  
146  
172  
195  
260  
325  
194  
228  
258  
344  
430  
146  
172  
195  
260  
325  
194  
228  
258  
344  
430  
135  
159  
180  
240  
300  
173  
204  
231  
308  
385  
135  
159  
180  
240  
300  
173  
204  
231  
308  
385  
135  
159  
180  
240  
300  
173  
204  
231  
308  
385  
Setting range 200 ... 820 A  
1)  
3UF5 05  
3TF6 8  
3TF6 9  
630  
820  
630  
820  
630  
820  
502  
662  
502  
662  
502  
662  
440  
572  
440  
572  
440  
572  
408  
531  
408  
531  
408  
531  
376  
500  
376  
500  
376  
500  
1)  
1) Contactors mountable.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/31  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5  
motor protection and control devices  
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders  
with short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 690 V for 3RB1 2 and 3UF5 0, Part 2  
1)  
Basic units  
Contactors  
Fuse links  
690 V  
415 V  
600 V  
LV HRC  
Type 3NA  
Type 5SB  
Type 5SE  
Type 3ND  
aM  
British Standards UL-listed fuses RK5/L  
fuses BS88  
DIAZED  
NEOZED  
Operational class gL  
(gG)  
2
Type of coordination )  
1
2
500  
Setting range 1.25 ... 6.3 A  
3UF5 00  
3RT1 015  
3RT1 016  
3RT1 017  
35  
35  
35  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
25  
25  
25  
Setting range 6.3 ... 25 A  
3UF5 01  
3RT1 015  
3RT1 016  
3RT1 017  
3RT1 024  
3RT1 025  
3RT1 026  
3RT1 034  
3RT1 035  
35  
35  
35  
63  
20  
20  
20  
25  
25  
35  
63  
63  
20  
20  
20  
25  
25  
25  
63  
63  
60  
60  
60  
70  
20  
20  
20  
50  
50  
63  
70  
100  
125  
125  
100  
100  
100  
Setting range 25 ... 100 A  
3UF5 02  
3RT1 034  
3RT1 035  
3RT1 036  
3RT1 044  
3RT1 045  
3RT1 046  
125  
125  
160  
250  
250  
250  
63  
63  
80  
125  
160  
160  
50  
50  
50  
63  
80  
100  
63  
80  
80  
125  
160  
160  
125  
150  
200  
250  
250  
350  
Setting range 50 ... 205 A  
3UF5 03  
3RT1 054  
3RT1 055  
3RT1 056  
355  
355  
355  
315  
315  
315  
160  
200  
200  
250  
315  
315  
450  
500  
500  
Setting range 125 ... 500 A  
3UF5 04  
3RT1 064  
3RT1 065  
3RT1 066  
3RT1 075  
3RT1 076  
3RT1 264  
3RT1 265  
3RT1 266  
3RT1 275  
3RT1 276  
500  
500  
500  
630  
630  
500  
500  
500  
800  
800  
400  
400  
400  
400  
500  
500  
500  
500  
800  
800  
250  
315  
315  
400  
500  
400  
400  
400  
630  
630  
400  
400  
400  
450  
500  
450  
450  
450  
800  
800  
700  
800  
800  
1000  
1200  
800  
800  
800  
1200  
1200  
Setting range 200 ... 820 A  
3)  
4
3UF5 05  
3TF6 8  
3TF6 9  
1000  
1250  
500 )  
630  
630  
500  
630  
1200  
2000 CLASS L  
3)  
4
630 )  
1) Note the operational voltage.  
2) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices  
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1:  
Type of coordination "1": Contactors or starters must not endanger  
persons or equipment in the event of a short-circuit. They do not have to  
be suitable for further operation without repair and the renewal of parts.  
Type of coordination "2": Contactors or starters must not endanger  
persons or equipment in the event of a short-circuit and must be suitable  
for continued use. There is a risk of contact welding.  
3) Contactors mountable.  
4) Ensure that the maximum AC-3 operational current is sufficiently different  
from the rated fuse current.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/32  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5  
motor protection and control devices  
Characteristic curves  
Dimensional drawings  
3UF5 001, 3UF5 011 and 3UF5 021 basic units  
Tripping characteristics for three-pole loads  
10  
120  
4,5  
NSA00146  
100  
7,2  
50  
100  
20  
10  
CLASS 30  
5
25  
20  
2
1
50  
127,5  
50  
70  
5
20  
15  
10  
a
f
10  
CLASS  
5
5
2
0,6  
1
2
5
I
10x  
e
NSA00148  
Tripping current (average)  
c
d
d
The current-time curves for 3-pole symmetrical load show the  
relationship between the release time from cold and multiples of  
the operational current.  
a
b
c
e
-
f
If the device is pre-loaded with 100 % of the current setting, the  
tripping times are reduced.  
3UF50 01  
3UF50 11  
3UF50 21  
10 34 29 46  
10 34 29 46 48  
15 29 24 47 48  
-
4
4
Tripping characteristics for double-pole loads  
3UF5 031, 3UF5 041 and 3UF5 051 basic units  
120  
g
NSA00147  
100  
p
f
q
h
50  
20  
10  
CLASS 30  
5
25  
20  
2
1
50  
20  
15  
10  
10  
m
j
CLASS  
5
k
5
2
e
l
n
a
c
0,6  
1
2
5
10x  
I
e
Tripping current (average)  
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
In the case of 2-pole loading (failure of one phase) or current  
unbalance > 40 % of the current setting, the tripping times are  
reduced, because the heat generated due to the unbalanced  
loading of the motor rises.  
3
3
3
U
U
U
F
F
F
5
5
5
0
0
0
3
4
5
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
4
3
0
5
0
8
8
8
5
5
5
1
1
1
5
7
9
5
5
0
1
1
1
1
0
2
0
5
0
4
5
7
0
0
0
Ø
7
4
5
7
2
2
0
3
4
–
7
Ø
Ø
9
1
8
1
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
3
3
3
U
U
U
F
F
F
5
5
5
0
0
0
3
4
5
1
1
1
M
8
1
1
1
2
3
3
5
0
5
4
4
5
1
6
5
2
3
4
0
0
0
1
1
1
3
5
6
1
1
6
7
7
7
,
,
,
2
2
2
1
–
–
3
1
1
1
4
6
7
5
0
5
4
6
8
M
M
1
1
0
2
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/33  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5  
motor protection and control devices  
3UF5 1 expansion module  
3UF5 2 operator panel  
NSA00151  
10  
4,5  
7,2  
100  
98  
32  
50  
70  
5
127,5  
Schematics  
Reversing starter  
PROFIBUS-DP  
19 20  
3/N/PE 50/60 Hz 400/230 V AC  
L1  
L2  
L3  
N
2L1  
2N  
1L1  
1N  
-S621 -S7  
13  
13  
-S8  
PE  
2N  
/1.3  
LEFT  
O2FF2 RIGHT14  
PE  
14  
3
6
2
4
1
2
11  
18  
13 14  
1
12  
8
2
3
-X1  
-X19  
1
2
-F11  
/1.8  
-Q1  
2N  
/1.3  
/1.6  
>
5
3
1
11  
-Q1  
/1.1  
12  
2
1
4
3
6
5
2
1
4
3
6
5
-K1  
/1.4  
-K2  
/1.4  
A1 A2 SPE/PE  
B
T1 T2  
6
A
10  
1
2
3
4
5
-A3  
READY  
GEN. FAULT  
-A1  
OVERLOAD  
LEFT  
CURRENT UNBALANCE  
PHASE FAILURE  
RIGHT  
OFF  
LOCKING PROTECTION  
CURRENT DETECTION  
RESET/TEST  
3UF52 OPERATOR CONTROL MODULE  
3UF50 BASIC UNIT  
11  
7
8
9
A1  
A2  
A1  
A2  
-K1  
/1.7  
-K2  
/1.7  
2N  
-X1  
/1.4  
-X19  
6
5
4
4
NSA0_00144b  
-X2  
1
2
3
-H1  
FAULT  
2N.  
/1.5  
U V W  
PE  
M
3AC  
-M1  
Further circuit diagrams for the control functions overload, direct  
online starter, wye-delta starter, pole reversing, Dahlander  
circuit, solenoid valve, gate valve (servo drives) and 3RW2 2 soft  
starter and a configuration example are included in the 3UF5 7  
system manual.  
More information  
System manual  
Internet  
For selection of equipment and for planning, it is recommended  
that the 3UF5 7 system manual is consulted.  
You can find more information on the Internet at:  
http://www.siemens.com/simocode-dp  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/34  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
3UF18 current transformers  
for overload protection  
Overview  
The 3UF1 8 current transformers are protection transformers and  
are used for actuating overload relays. Protection transformers  
are designed to ensure proportional current transfer up to a  
multiple of the primary rated current. The 3UF18 current  
transformers convert the maximum current of the corresponding  
operating range into the standard signal 1 A secondary.  
Technical specifications  
Climatic environmental conditions  
Temperatures  
• Operation  
• Storage/transport  
°C  
°C  
-25 ... +60  
-40 ... +85  
Temperature changes  
• Operation  
• Storage/transport  
°C/h  
°C/h  
max. 10  
max. 20  
Relative humidity  
%
15 ... 95 (indoor, acc. to IEC 60721-3, no condensation)  
Air pressure  
• Operation  
• Storage/transport  
hPa  
hPa  
860 ... 1060  
650 ... 1060  
Contaminants  
• SO  
ppm  
ppm  
0.5 (relative humidity ˆ 60 %, no condensation)  
0.1 (relative humidity ˆ 60 %, no condensation)  
2
• H S  
2
Mechanical environmental conditions  
Vibrations  
(acc. to IEC 60068-2-6)  
Hz  
Hz  
10 ... 57 (for constant amplitude 0.15 nm)  
57 ... 150 (for constant acceleration 2 g)  
Shock (acc. to IEC 60068-2-27)  
Requirements acc. to IEC and DIN  
Degree of protection (acc. to IEC 60529)  
Rated insulation voltage  
12 shocks (half sine 15 g/11 ms)  
IP20  
V
V
690/1000 (type-dependent)  
600  
Rating of the insulation  
(acc. to UL/CSA)  
Trip class (acc. to IEC 60947-4-1)  
Suitable from CLASS 5 to CLASS 30  
Power loss per conducting path of the  
transformers  
Operating range  
for setting ...  
to the lower limit  
to the upper limit  
A
mW (mVA)  
33 (38)  
mW (mVA)  
570 (650)  
• 3UF18 45  
• 3UF18 48  
• 3UF18 50  
• 3UF18 52  
• 3UF18 56  
• 3UF18 57  
• 3UF18 68-3F  
• 3UF18 68-3G  
12.5 ... 50  
25 ... 100  
32 ... 130  
50 ... 200  
100 ... 400  
125 ... 500  
160 ... 630  
205 ... 820  
110 (120)  
135 (150)  
170 (190)  
450 (500)  
850 (940)  
900 (1000)  
1400 (1600)  
1700 (1900)  
2400 (2700)  
2600 (2900)  
6500 (7000)  
13000 (15000)  
17000 (19000)  
22000 (25000)  
Conductor cross-sections  
(one or two conductors connectable)  
Current transformers  
on second- on primary side  
ary side  
1)  
1)  
3UF18 45  
3UF18 48  
3UF18 50  
3UF18 52 3UF18 56  
3UF18 57  
3UF18 68- 3UF18 68-  
2)  
2)  
2)  
3FA00  
3GA00  
• Terminal screw  
• Solid  
• Stranded  
• Finely stranded without end sleeve  
• Finely stranded with end sleeve  
• Finely stranded with cable lug  
• Stranded with cable lug  
• Connecting bars  
M 3.5  
2 ™ 1.5 ... 2.5  
2 ™ 1.5 ... 2.5  
--  
for connec- for connec- for connec- M 8  
M 10  
--  
--  
--  
--  
M 10  
--  
--  
--  
--  
M 12  
--  
--  
--  
--  
185 ... 240  
185 ... 240  
50 ™ 5  
2
2
2
2
2
2
tion data  
see 3RT  
tion data  
see 3RT  
tion data  
see 3RT  
mm  
mm  
mm  
mm  
mm  
mm  
mm  
--  
--  
--  
Contactors Contactors Contactors  
2 ™ 1.5  
--  
3
--  
--  
--  
35 ... 95  
50 ... 240 ) 50 ... 240  
3
50 ... 120 70 ... 240 ) 70 ... 240  
20 ™ 4  
25  
6
™
6.30  
™
30 ™ 5  
• Tightening torque  
• Tightening torque  
Nm  
lb  
0.8 ... 1.4  
7 ... 12  
10 ... 14  
89 ... 124 124 ... 210  
14 ... 24  
14 ... 24  
124 ... 210 124 ... 210  
14 ... 24  
1) With or without box terminal.  
2) Conductor cross-sections for box terminals, see 3TF6 8 and 3TF6 9  
contactors in the section Contactors and Contactor Assemblies.  
3) With max. conductor cross-section, a terminal cover for maintaining the  
phase spacing is required.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/35  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
3UF18 current transformers  
for overload protection  
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for  
1)  
short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 690 V , 50/60 Hz  
2)  
Overload relays  
Contactors Rated operational current I AC-3 in A  
Type of coordination  
e
with 400 V and Class ...  
5 and 10 15  
20  
25  
30  
1
2
3)  
Fuse links in A  
LV HRC, Type 3NA  
DIAZED, Type 5SB  
NEOZED Type 5SE  
NH TYPE British  
3ND  
Standards  
fuses  
gL/gG  
aM  
BS88  
Operating range 0.25 ... 2.5 A  
3UF18 43-1BA00  
3RT1 015  
2.5  
2.5  
2.5  
2.5  
2.5  
25  
10  
--  
--  
Operating range 1.25 ... 12.5 A  
3UF18 43-1AA00  
3RT1 015  
3RT1 016  
3RT1 017  
3RT1 024  
3RT1 025  
7
9
12  
12  
12.5  
7
9
11  
12  
12.5  
7
9
10  
12  
12.5  
7
9
9.5  
12  
12.5  
7
9
9
12  
12.5  
25  
25  
25  
35  
35  
10  
10  
10  
16  
16  
--  
--  
--  
20  
20  
--  
--  
--  
35  
35  
Operating range 2.5 ... 25 A  
3UF18 43-2BA00  
3RT1 015  
7
9
7
9
7
9
7
9
7
9
9
12  
14  
14  
19.1  
25  
25  
25  
25  
63  
63  
63  
63  
63  
10  
10  
10  
25  
25  
25  
25  
25  
--  
--  
--  
20  
20  
35  
--  
--  
--  
--  
35  
35  
50  
--  
3RT1 016  
3RT1 017  
3RT1 024  
3RT1 025  
3RT1 026  
3RT1 034  
3RT1 035  
12  
12  
17  
25  
--  
11  
12  
17  
18  
25  
--  
10  
12  
16  
16  
22.3  
25  
9.5  
12  
15  
15  
20.3  
25  
--  
--  
--  
Operating range 12.5 ... 50 A  
3UF18 45-2CA00  
3RT1 025  
17  
25  
32  
40  
50  
--  
17  
18  
25.5  
33  
38.5  
50  
--  
16  
16  
22.3  
29.4  
32.7  
49  
15  
15  
20.3  
28  
29.4  
45  
14  
14  
63  
25  
35  
63  
63  
80  
80  
80  
80  
20  
35  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
35  
50  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
3RT1 026  
3RT1 034  
3RT1 035  
3RT1 036  
3RT1 044  
3RT1 045  
3RT1 046  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
19.1  
26.5  
26.5  
41.7  
45  
--  
--  
50  
--  
47  
50  
--  
50  
Operating range 16 ... 65 A  
3UF18 47-2DA00  
3RT1 034  
32  
40  
50  
65  
65  
--  
25.5  
33  
38.5  
56  
61  
65  
22.3  
29.4  
32.7  
49  
53  
59  
20.3  
28  
29.4  
45  
47  
53  
19.1  
26.5  
26.5  
41.7  
45  
125  
125  
160  
160  
160  
160  
160  
63  
63  
80  
125  
125  
125  
125  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
3RT1 035  
3RT1 036  
3RT1 044  
3RT1 045  
3RT1 046  
3RT1 054  
50  
65  
65  
65  
65  
65  
Operating range 25 ... 100 A  
3UF18 48-2EA00  
3RT1 044  
65  
80  
95  
100  
--  
65  
61  
69  
93  
100  
--  
49  
53  
59  
82  
100  
--  
45  
47  
53  
75  
98  
100  
41.7  
45  
50  
69  
90  
250  
250  
250  
250  
250  
250  
125  
160  
160  
160  
160  
160  
--  
--  
--  
125  
125  
125  
--  
--  
--  
125  
125  
125  
3RT1 045  
3RT1 046  
3RT1 054  
3RT1 055  
3RT1 056  
--  
100  
1) Voltage tolerance –5 %.  
2) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices  
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1:  
Type of coordination 1:  
Contactors or starters must not endanger persons or equipment in the  
event of a short-circuit. They do not have to be suitable for further  
operation without repair and the renewal of parts.  
Type of coordination 2:  
Contactors or starters must not endanger persons or equipment in the  
event of a short-circuit. These must be suitable for subsequent operation.  
There is a risk of contact welding.  
3) Note the operational voltage.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/36  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
3UF18 current transformers  
for overload protection  
1)  
Overload relays  
Contactors Rated operational current I AC-3 in A  
Type of coordination  
e
with 400 V and Class ...  
5 and 10 15  
20  
25  
30  
1
2
2)  
Fuse links in A  
LV HRC, Type 3NA  
DIAZED, Type 5SB  
NEOZED Type 5SE  
NH TYPE British  
3ND  
Standards  
fuses  
gL/gG  
aM  
BS88  
Operating range 32 ... 130 A  
3UF18 50-3AA00  
3RT1 044  
65  
80  
95  
115  
130  
--  
56  
61  
69  
93  
122  
130  
--  
49  
53  
59  
82  
107  
130  
--  
45  
47  
53  
75  
98  
120  
130  
41.7  
45  
50  
69  
90  
250  
250  
250  
315  
315  
315  
315  
125  
160  
160  
224  
224  
224  
224  
--  
--  
--  
160  
160  
160  
160  
--  
--  
--  
160  
160  
160  
160  
3RT1 045  
3RT1 046  
3RT1 054  
3RT1 055  
3RT1 056  
3RT1 064  
111  
130  
--  
Operating range 50 ... 200 A  
3UF18 52-3BA00  
3RT1 054  
115  
150  
185  
200  
--  
93  
82  
75  
98  
69  
90  
355  
355  
355  
355  
355  
355  
355  
224  
224  
224  
224  
224  
224  
224  
160  
160  
160  
160  
160  
160  
160  
200  
200  
200  
200  
200  
200  
200  
3RT1 055  
3RT1 056  
3RT1 064  
3RT1 065  
3RT1 066  
3RT1 075  
122  
150  
182  
200  
--  
107  
131  
160  
188  
200  
--  
120  
146  
172  
195  
200  
111  
135  
159  
180  
200  
--  
--  
--  
Operating range 63 ... 250 A  
3UF18 54-3CA00  
3RT1 056  
185  
225  
250  
--  
--  
--  
150  
182  
215  
243  
250  
--  
131  
160  
188  
213  
250  
--  
120  
146  
172  
195  
250  
--  
111  
135  
159  
180  
240  
250  
355  
400  
500  
500  
500  
500  
250  
250  
400  
400  
400  
400  
160  
250  
315  
315  
400  
400  
200  
355  
355  
355  
355  
355  
3RT1 064  
3RT1 065  
3RT1 066  
3RT1 075  
3RT1 076  
Operating range 100 ... 400 A  
3UF18 56-3DA00  
3RT1 065  
265  
300  
400  
--  
215  
243  
324  
400  
--  
188  
213  
284  
355  
400  
172  
195  
260  
325  
400  
159  
180  
240  
300  
400  
500  
500  
630  
630  
800  
400  
400  
500  
500  
500  
315  
315  
400  
500  
630  
400  
400  
450  
450  
450  
3RT1 066  
3RT1 075  
3RT1 076  
3TF6 8  
--  
Operating range 125 ... 500 A  
3UF18 57-3EA00  
3RT1 066  
300  
400  
500  
--  
243  
324  
405  
500  
--  
213  
284  
355  
500  
--  
195  
260  
325  
479  
500  
180  
240  
300  
441  
500  
500  
800  
800  
800  
800  
400  
500  
500  
500  
500  
315  
400  
500  
630  
630  
400  
450  
450  
450  
450  
3RT1 075  
3RT1 076  
3TF6 8  
3TF6 9  
--  
Operating range 160 ... 630 A  
3UF18 68-3FA00  
3RT1 075  
3RT1 076  
3TF6 8  
400  
500  
630  
--  
324  
405  
630  
--  
284  
355  
536  
--  
260  
325  
479  
531  
240  
300  
441  
500  
800  
800  
1000  
1000  
500  
500  
500  
500  
400  
500  
630  
630  
450  
450  
450  
450  
3TF6 9  
Operating range 200 ... 820 A  
3UF18 69-3GA00  
3TF6 8  
3TF6 9  
630  
820  
630  
662  
536  
572  
479  
531  
441  
500  
1000  
1000  
500  
500  
630  
630  
450  
450  
1) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices  
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1:  
Type of coordination 1:  
Contactors or starters must not endanger persons or equipment in the  
event of a short-circuit. They do not have to be suitable for further  
operation without repair and the renewal of parts.  
Type of coordination 2:  
Contactors or starters must not endanger persons or equipment in the  
event of a short-circuit. These must be suitable for subsequent operation.  
There is a risk of contact welding.  
2) Note the operational voltage.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/37  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
3UF18 current transformers  
for overload protection  
Dimensional drawings  
3UF18 43 current transformer  
3UF18 45 current transformer  
for stand-alone installation: for screw and snap-on mounting onto 35 mm  
standard mounting rails according to EN 50022  
9
M
4
1
)
1
)
6
6
5
5
1
0
2
6
4
5
M
4
M
3
,
5
3
5
6
9
4
4
5
N
S
A
0
_
0
0
1
5
6
4
,
5
1) Clearance to grounded components.  
2) Snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rails  
EN 50022-35 x 7.5 or EN 50022-35 x 15  
3UF18 47 to 3UF18 52 current transformers  
j
b
h
q
6,2  
i
g
a
a
1
1
Additional cover, can be shortened  
a
b
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
q
Transformers Contactors  
3UF1 847  
3UF1 848  
3RT1 044  
3RT1 045  
3RT1 046  
26,5 25  
26,5 25  
82  
82  
111 122 10,5 90  
111 122 10,5 90  
46 90 105 35 62  
46 90 105 35 62  
89 Ø 6,2  
89 Ø 6,2  
3UF1 850  
3UF1 852  
37  
42  
37,5 71,5 99 114 15  
37,5 71,5 102 122 20  
110 41 120 95  
110 42 120 95  
33 67  
33 67  
98 Ø 6,6  
98 Ø 9  
3UF1 854 to 3UF1 857 current transformers  
9
i
j
0
,
5
6
1
5
5
0
1
0
6
6
1
1
f
o
r
M
1
0
1
2
7
1
4
5
T
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r
s
i
j
3
3
3
U
U
U
F
F
F
1
1
1
8
8
8
5
5
5
4
6
7
4
5
8
2
2
3
5
0
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/38  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
3UF18 current transformers  
for overload protection  
3UF18 68-3FA00, 3UF18 68-3GA00 current transformers  
For 3TF68 contactors  
70  
230  
c
70  
100  
14 for M 12  
28  
12  
12  
NSA0_00159  
14 for M 12  
d
0,5  
230  
15  
15  
40  
170  
Transformers  
Contactors  
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
3UF18 68-3FA00 3TF68  
3UF18 68-3GA00 3TF68  
390 398 30  
410 408 40  
5
8
145 175 420  
155 195 450  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/39  
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices  
3UL22 summation current transformers  
Overview  
The 3UL22 summation current transformers sense fault currents  
in machines and plants. Together with the 3UL21 evaluation unit  
or the SIMOCODE 3UF motor management and control device  
they enable residual-current and ground-fault monitoring.  
Technical specifications  
Summation current transformers  
Type  
3UL22 .1  
3UL22 .2  
3UL22 .3  
Rated insulation voltage U  
AC  
50/60 Hz  
690 V  
1000 V  
i
Rated fault current I  
Dn  
• Without response delay  
• With response delay  
A
A
0.3 ... 1  
1
0.3 ... 40  
1 ... 40  
0.3 ... 40  
1 ... 40  
Permissible ambient temperatures  
Feed-through openings  
°C  
-20 ... +70  
40  
mm  
65  
120  
For Protodur cables  
can be fed through  
max. mm² 4 x 95  
4 x 240  
8 x 300  
Dimensional drawings  
3UL22 summation current transformers  
a1  
a2  
a3  
b5  
NSB00364  
a4  
a5  
A2  
Z1  
Z3  
Z2  
a6  
c3  
b1  
a1  
a2 a3 a4  
a5  
a6  
b2  
b3  
b4 b5 c1 c2  
Type  
3UL22 1-A  
3UL22 2-A  
3UL22 3-A  
100 75 10 15  
125 95 10 15 for M 4  
200 165 20 20  
for M 4  
80 85 72,5  
100 110 97,5  
170 200 100  
42,5 7,5 40 65 50 40  
55 7,5 65 70 60 45  
100 10 120 85 70 55  
for M 4  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/40  
LOGO! Logic Modules  
General data  
Overview  
Design  
The LOGO! modular design is available in different variants for  
different supply voltages (12 V DC, 24 V DC, 24 V AC,  
115/230 V DC, 115/230 V AC):  
• Basic variants  
• Low-cost pure variants without operator control and display  
panels  
The LOGO! variants have the following distinguishing  
characteristics:  
• R: Relay output  
• C: Clock/time switch  
• o: Without display  
LOGO! is simple:  
• Warning and switching off in one unit; no other tools are  
required  
• Non-volatile storage of control program and setpoints  
(e.g. times) in integrated EEPROM  
• The compact, user-friendly, and low-cost solution for simple  
control tasks  
LOGO! is space-saving:  
• e.g. LOGO! 230RC: 72 x 90 x 55 mm (W x H x D)  
• Compact, user-friendly, can be used universally without  
accessories  
• "All in one": the display and operator panel are integrated  
• 36 different functions can be linked at a press of a button or  
with PC software; up to 130 times in total  
• Functions can be changed simply using buttons;  
no complicated rewiring  
• Fitted mounting in the distribution box (same mounting  
dimensions as the ground-fault circuit interrupter)  
LOGO! offers maximum flexibility and is universal:  
• Expandability:  
Depending on the application, additional expansion modules  
can be connected  
LOGO! is communication-capable:  
Catalog ST 70  
• Optional communication modules support interfacing to  
AS-Interface and instabus EIB networks  
Information on LOGO! can also be found in the catalog ST 70:  
http://www.siemens.com/automation/  
simatic/ftp/st70/html_00/st70k1ad.pdf  
Function  
LOGO! is simple:  
• 36 functions:  
Integrated basic functions (e.g. AND, OR) and special  
functions (e.g. timers, counters, latching relays, PI controllers)  
of the electronics  
• Program generation simply by combining stored functions at  
the press of a key or PC software  
• Easy-to-use and simple duplication of the control program  
with an optional program module  
LOGO! offers maximum flexibility and is universal:  
• Easy modification by reconnecting the functions at a press of  
a key; no need for time-consuming rewiring  
• Optional operation from the PC:  
For creating, simulating, online testing and archiving the  
control program on the PC, including documentation facility  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/41  
LOGO! Logic Modules  
LOGO! Modular basic variants  
Overview  
Function  
• Integrated basic and special functions:  
- Basic functions:  
AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR, positive/negative  
flank evaluation  
- Special functions:  
ON delay, latching ON delay, OFF delay, pulse relay, latching  
relay, counter (forwards/backwards), time switch, interval  
time-delay relay, operating hours meter, threshold switch,  
asynchronous pulse encoder, twelve-month time switch,  
easy-to-use switch function, random generator, staircase  
lighting function according to DIN 18015-2, edge-triggered  
interval time-delay relay, combined ON/OFF delay, analog  
comparator, analog threshold switch, analog delta threshold  
switch, analog watchdog, analog amplifier, text and variable  
display, shift register, softkey function, PI controller, ramp  
function, analog multiplexer  
• 130 function blocks can be combined  
• 24 flags (including start-up flag)  
• Integrated retentivity  
• The space-saving basic variants  
• With interface for connection of expansion modules  
• Password protection  
Optional function  
• Additional know-how protection with the optional program  
module  
Design  
• Relay outputs with up to 10 A output signal  
(not LOGO! 24)  
• Integrated front panel with background illumination  
(4x12 characters)  
• Integrated operator control panel  
• Integrated EEPROM for storing control program and setpoints  
• Optional program module  
• Integrated clock with automatic summertime/wintertime  
changeover (not LOGO! 24)  
• 8 digital inputs, 4 digital outputs  
• 2 inputs as analog inputs for 12/24 V DC variants  
(0 to 10 V); inputs can also be used as digital inputs  
• 2 inputs for counting up to 2 kHz can be used  
(for DC variants only)  
• Interface for connecting expansion modules, max. 24 digital  
inputs, 16 digital outputs, 8 analog inputs and 2 analog  
outputs can be addressed  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/42  
LOGO! Logic Modules  
LOGO! Modular pure variants  
Overview  
Function  
• Integrated basic and special functions:  
- Basic functions:  
AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR, positive/negative  
flank evaluation  
- Special functions:  
ON delay, latching ON delay, OFF delay, pulse relay, latching  
relay, counter (forwards/backwards), time switch, interval  
time-delay relay, operating hours meter, threshold switch,  
asynchronous pulse encoder, twelve-month time switch,  
easy-to-use switch function, random generator, staircase  
lighting function according to DIN 18015-2, edge-triggered  
interval time-delay relay, combined ON/OFF delay, analog  
comparator, analog threshold switch, analog delta threshold  
switch, analog watchdog, analog amplifier, shift register,  
softkey function, PI controller, ramp function, analog  
multiplexer  
• 130 function blocks can be combined  
• 24 flags (including start-up flag)  
• Integrated retentivity  
• The cost-optimized basic variants  
• With integrated interface for connection of expansion modules  
• Password protection  
Optional function  
• Additional know-how protection with the optional program  
module  
Design  
• Relay outputs with up to 10 A output signal  
• Integrated EEPROM for storing control program and setpoints  
• Optional program module  
• Integrated clock with automatic summertime/wintertime  
changeover (not LOGO! 24o)  
• 8 digital inputs, 4 digital outputs  
• 2 inputs as analog inputs for 12/24 V DC variants  
(0 to 10 V); inputs can also be used as digital inputs  
• 2 inputs for counting up to 2 kHz can be used  
(for DC variants only)  
• Interface for connecting expansion modules, max. 24 digital  
inputs, 16 digital outputs, 8 analog inputs and 2 analog  
outputs can be addressed  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/43  
LOGO! Logic Modules  
LOGO! Software  
Overview  
Function  
• Control program generation with the programming languages  
FBD and LAD (switchable). How to place the functions on the  
drawing board by means of "Drag and Drop" is almost self-  
explanatory  
• Comprehensive documentation functions:  
Various print options permit professional documentation  
• Program simulation (offline):  
For preliminary text of switching programs on the PC  
• Program test (online):  
The current values of LOGO! are presented on screen  
• Comprehensive, context-sensitive online help functions  
The following functions are available:  
• Basic functions (AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR, positive  
edge evaluation, negative edge evaluation)  
• ON delay  
• OFF delay  
• Current impulse relay  
• Latching  
• The user-friendly software for switchgear program generation  
on the PC  
• Switchgear program generation for function diagrams (FBD)  
or contact diagrams (LAD)  
• Latching ON delay  
• Operating hours meter  
• Interval time-delay relay/pulse output mode  
• Up/down counter  
• Threshold switch  
• Pulse encoder  
• Additional testing, simulation, online testing and archiving of  
the switchgear programs  
• Professional documentation with the help of various comment  
and print functions  
• Twelve-month time switch  
• Time switch  
• ON/OFF delay  
Design  
The connection between LOGO! and the PC is established with  
the help of the LOGO! PC cable (serial interface)  
• Random generator  
• Edge-triggered interval time-delay relay  
• Analog threshold switch  
• Analog comparator  
• Analog delta threshold switch  
• Analog watchdog  
• Analog amplifier  
• Staircase lighting switch  
• Easy-to-use switch  
• Message texts  
Minimum system requirements  
Windows 98 SE, NT 4.0, ME, 2000 or XP  
• Pentium PC  
• 90 MB free on hard disk  
• 64 MB RAM  
• SVGA graphics card with minimum 800x600 resolution  
(256 colors)  
Mac OS X  
• PowerMac G3, G4, G4 Cube, iMac, PowerBook G3, G4 or  
iBook  
• Shift register  
• Softkey  
• PI controller  
Linux (tested with Caldera OpenLinux 2.4)  
• Runs on all Linux releases on which Java 2 SDK Version 1.3.1  
runs  
• Ramp function  
• Please consult your Linux release for hardware requirements  
• Analog multiplexer  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/44  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
General data  
Function  
3RP15/3RP20/7PV function table  
Function  
Function chart  
3RP20 timing re- 3RP15 timing relay and  
lay and 3RP19 01 3RP19 01 label set  
label set  
7PV timing  
relay  
Timing relay energized  
Contact closed  
Contact open  
1 CO contact  
ON-delay  
7
7
7
7
7
A
B
7
7
7
A1/A2  
15/18  
15/16  
t
1)  
2)  
OFF-delay  
with auxiliary voltage  
7
7
A1/A2  
B1/A2  
>
35 ms  
15/18  
15/16  
t
>
OFF-delay  
without auxiliary voltage  
7
200 ms  
A1/A2  
15/18  
15/16  
t
1)  
ON-delay and  
OFF-delay with  
auxiliary voltage  
7
7
7
7
C
D
A1/A2  
B1/A2  
(t = t = t  
)
15/18  
15/16  
on  
off  
t
t
3)  
Flashing,  
starting with interval  
(pulse/interval 1:1)  
7
A1/A2  
15/18  
15/16  
t
t
Clock-pulse,  
A1/A2  
7
starting with interval  
15/18  
15/16  
(dead interval, pulse time, and  
time setting ranges each  
separately adjustable)  
Interval  
Pulse period  
4)  
A1/A2  
Passing make contact  
7
7
7
7
E
7
15/18  
15/16  
t
1)  
Passing break contact  
with auxiliary voltage  
F
A1/A2  
B1/A2  
>
35 ms  
15/18  
15/16  
t
1)  
5)  
Pulse-forming with  
7
7
7
7
G
7
A1/A2  
B1/A2  
>
35 ms  
auxiliary voltage  
(pulse generation  
at the output does not depend  
on duration of energizing)  
15/18  
15/16  
t
1)  
Additive ON-delay  
with auxiliary voltage  
H
A1/A2  
B1/A2  
t1  
t3  
t2  
15/18  
15/16  
t
1 NO contact (semiconductor)  
ON-delay  
The two-wire timing relay is connec-  
7
A1/A2  
ted in series with the load. Timing  
begins after application of the excit-  
ing voltage. The semiconductor  
output then becomes conducting,  
and the load is energized.  
t
1) Note on function with start contact: A new control signal at terminal B,  
after the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero. This  
3) For the flashing function, the start between interval D and pulse Di is  
selectable.  
!
!
does not apply to G, G and H, H , which are not retriggerable.  
4) This function is indicated on the unit with the identification letter H.  
5) This function is indicated on the unit with the identification letter B.  
2) This function is indicated on the unit with the identification letter C.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/45  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
General data  
Function  
Function chart  
3RP20 timing relay 3RP15 timing relay and  
and 3RP19 01  
label set  
3RP19 01 label set  
Timing relay energized  
Contact closed  
Contact open  
2 CO contacts  
ON-delay  
A1/A2  
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
A
7
15/18  
15/16  
25/28  
25/26  
t
t
ON-delay  
and instantaneous contact  
A!  
A1/A2  
15/18  
15/16  
21/24  
21/22  
1)  
A1/A2  
OFF-delay with  
auxiliary voltage  
7
B
>
35 ms  
B1/A2  
15/18  
15/16  
25/28  
25/26  
t
1)  
OFF-delay  
with auxiliary voltage  
and instantaneous contact  
7
7
B!  
A1/A2  
B1/A2  
>
35ms  
15/18  
15/16  
t
21/24  
21/22  
>
OFF-delay without  
auxiliary voltage  
200 ms  
7
A1/A2  
15/18  
15/16  
25/28  
25/26  
t
1)  
ON-delay and OFF-delay with  
7
7
7
C
A1/A2  
B1/A2  
auxiliary voltage (t = t = t  
)
on  
off  
15/18  
15/16  
25/28  
25/26  
t
t
t
1)  
ON-delay and OFF-delay with  
A1/A2  
B1/A2  
7
7
7
7
C!  
auxiliary voltage and instantaneous  
contact (t = t = t  
)
on  
off  
15/18  
15/16  
t
21/24  
21/22  
Flashing,  
starting with interval  
(pulse/interval 1:1)  
7
D
A1/A2  
15/18  
15/16  
25/28  
25/26  
t
t
Flashing,  
7
7
7
7
D!  
A1/A2  
starting with interval  
(pulse/interval 1:1)  
15/18  
15/16  
t
t
and instantaneous contact  
21/24  
21/22  
Passing make contact  
7
E
A1/A2  
15/18  
15/16  
25/28  
25/26  
t
Passing make contact  
and instantaneous contact  
7
7
E!  
A1/A2  
15/18  
15/16  
t
21/24  
21/22  
1) Note on function with start contact: A new control signal at terminal B,  
after the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero. This  
!
!
does not apply to G, G and H, H , which are not retriggerable.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/46  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
General data  
Function  
Function chart  
3RP20 timing  
relay and  
3RP19 01 label  
set  
3RP15 timing relay and  
3RP19 01 label set  
Timing relay energized  
Contact closed  
Contact open  
2 CO contacts  
Passing break contact  
with auxiliary voltage  
1)  
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
F
A1/A2  
B1/A2  
>
35ms  
15/18  
15/16  
25/28  
25/26  
t
1)  
F!  
Passing break contact  
with auxiliary voltage  
and instantaneous contact  
A1/A2  
B1/A2  
>
35ms  
15/18  
15/16  
t
21/24  
21/22  
1)  
Pulse-forming  
with auxiliary voltage  
(pulse generation  
at the output does not depend  
on duration of energizing)  
7
G
A1/A2  
B1/A2  
>
35ms  
15/18  
15/16  
25/28  
25/26  
t
1)  
G!  
Pulse-forming  
A1/A2  
B1/A2  
>
with auxiliary voltage  
and instantaneous contact  
(pulse generation  
35ms  
15/18  
15/16  
at the output does not depend  
on duration of energizing)  
t
21/24  
21/22  
1)  
Additive ON-delay  
with auxiliary voltage  
7
H
A1/A2  
B1/A2  
t
t
3
1
t
2
15/18  
15/16  
25/28  
25/26  
t
1)  
H!  
Additive ON-delay  
with auxiliary voltage and  
instantaneous contact  
7
7
7
7
.
/
A
2
t
t
3
1
t
2
.
/
A
2
5
/
1
8
5
/
1
6
t
1
/
2
4
1
/
2
2
Wye-delta function  
A1/A2  
17/18  
27/28  
*D  
t
50ms  
2 NO contacts  
Wye-delta function *D  
A1/A2  
7
17/18  
17/28  
t
50 ms  
3 NO contacts  
Wye-delta function  
7
A1/A2  
B1/A2  
17/18  
17/28  
17/16  
2)  
with overtravel function  
(idling)  
50ms  
t
t
Idling  
1) Note on function with start contact: A new control signal at terminal B,  
after the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero. This  
2) For function diagrams showing the various possibilities of operation of the  
3RP15 60-1S.30 (see Page 7/48).  
!
!
does not apply to G, G and H, H , which are not retriggerable.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/47  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
General data  
3RP15 function table  
Possibilities of operation of the 3RP15 60-1S.30 timing relay  
Timing relay energized  
Contact closed  
t
t
= star time  
1 to 20 s  
Y
= idling time (overtravel time) 30 to 600 s  
Idling  
Contact open  
Operation 1  
Operation 1:  
Start contact B./A2 is opened when supply voltage A./A2 is applied.  
A./A2  
The supply voltage is applied to A./A2 and there is no control signal on  
B./A2. This starts the *D timing. The idling time (overtravel time) is  
B./A2  
started by applying a control signal to B./A2. When the set time I  
Idling  
(30 to 600 s) has elapsed, the output relays (17/16 and 17/28) are reset.  
If the control signal on B./A2 is switched off (minimum OFF period  
270 ms), a new timing is started.  
17/18  
Y
Comments:  
Observe response time (dead time) of 400 ms on energizing supply  
voltage until contacts 17/18 and 17/16 close.  
17/28  
17/16  
Operation 2:  
t
t
Y
50 ms  
50 ms  
tIdling  
t Idling  
Y
Start contact B./A2 is closed when supply voltage A./A2 is applied.  
300 ms  
If the control signal B./A2 is already present when the supply voltage  
A./A2 is applied, no timing is started. The timing is only started when the  
control signal B./A2 is switched off.  
Operation 2  
A./A2  
Operation 3:  
Start contact B./A2 closes while star time is running.  
B./A2  
If the control signal B./A2 is applied again during the star time, the idling  
time starts and the timing is terminated normally.  
17/18  
Y
Operation 4:  
17/28  
17/16  
Start contact B./A2 opens while delta time is running and is applied  
again.  
If the control signal on B./A2 is applied and switched off again during  
the delta time, although the idling time has not yet elapsed, the idling  
time (overtravel time) is reset to zero. If the control signal is re-applied to  
B./A2, the idling time is restarted.  
NSB00892  
t
t Idling  
50 ms  
Y
Operation 3  
Application example based on standard operation (operation 1)  
For example, use of 3RP15 60 for compressor control  
A./A2  
Frequent starting of compressors strains the network, the machine, and  
the increased costs for the operator. The new timing relay prevents  
frequent starting at times when there is high demand for compressed  
air. A special control circuit prevents the compressor from being  
switched off immediately when the required air pressure in the tank has  
been reached. Instead, the valve in the intake tube is closed and the  
compressor runs in "Idling" mode for a specific time which can be set  
from 30 to 600 s.  
B./A2  
17/18  
Y
17/28  
17/16  
If the pressure falls within this time, the motor does not have to be  
restarted again, but can return to nominal load operation from no-load  
operation.  
NSB00893  
t
50 ms  
Y
If the pressure does not fall within this idling time, the motor is switched  
off.  
t Idling  
the pressure switch controls the timing via B./A2.  
Operation 4  
The supply voltage is applied to A./A2 and the start contact B./A2 is  
open, i.e. there is no control signal on B./A2 when the supply voltage is  
applied. The pressure switch signals "too little pressure in system" and  
starts the timing by way of terminal B./A2. The compressor is started,  
enters *D operation, and fills the pressure tank.  
A./A2  
B./A2  
When the pressure switch signals "sufficient pressure", the control signal  
B./A2 is applied, the idling time (overtravel time) is started, and the  
compressor enters no-load operation for the set period of time between  
30 to 600 s. The compressor is then switched off. The compressor is  
only restarted if the pressure switch responds again (low pressure).  
17/18  
Y
17/28  
17/16  
t
<tIdling  
<tIdling  
t Idling  
50 ms  
Y
The following applies to all operations:  
The pressure switch controls the timing via B./A2.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/48  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,  
22.5 mm  
Overview  
Function  
• Changes to the time setting ranges and the functions must be  
carried out in the de-energized state  
• Start input B1 or B3 must only be triggered when the supply  
voltage is applied  
Standards  
The timing relays comply with:  
• EN 60721-3-3 "Environmental conditions"  
• EN 61812-1/DIN VDE 0435 Part 2021 "Solid-state relays,  
timing relays"  
• EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 "Electromagnetic  
compatibility"  
• EN 60947-5-1; (VDE 0660 Part 200) "Low-voltage controlgear,  
switchgear and systems – Electromechanical controlgear"  
• The same potential must be applied to A1 and B1 or A3 and  
B3. With two-voltage version, only one voltage range must be  
connected  
• The activation of loads parallel to the start input is not  
permissible when using AC (see diagrams)  
• Surge suppression is integrated in the timing relay. This  
prevents the generation of voltage peaks on the supply  
voltage when the relay is switched on and off. No additional  
damping measures are necessary  
3RP15 timing relays, width 22.5 mm  
• 3RP15 05-.R must not be operated next to heat sources  
> 60 °C  
LED for indicating  
"Time relay on voltage"  
Operating time  
adjustment  
LED for indicating  
"Relay switched"  
Parallel load on start input  
L1  
Inspection window for  
set time range  
Time setting  
range selector  
switch  
S1  
Inspection window for  
set function  
Function  
switch  
A1  
K2  
B1  
K1  
Decive labeling  
plate  
A2  
N
NSB0_01423  
NSB00895  
Accessories  
L1  
Push-in lugs for screw mounting  
K1  
B1  
S1  
A1  
K2  
K1  
A2  
N
Sealable cap  
NSB00896  
Label set for marking the multifunction relay  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/49  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,  
22.5 mm  
Technical specifications  
Type  
3RP15 05 3RP15 11 3RP15 40 3RP15 60 3RP15 74 3RP15 27  
3RP15 31 3RP15 12  
3RP15 32 3RP15 13  
3RP15 33 3RP15 25  
3RP15 55  
3RP15 76  
Rated insulation voltage  
Pollution degree 3  
V AC 300; 500 for 3RP15 05-1BT10  
Overvoltage category III  
1)  
Operating range at excitation  
0.85 ... 1.1 x U with AC; 0.8 ... 1.25 x U with DC;  
s
s
0.95 ... 1.05 times rated frequency  
Rated power  
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz  
W
VA  
2
6
1
1
2)  
2
6
Rated operational current I  
• AC-14, DC-13  
• AC-15 at 230V, 50 Hz  
e
A
A
--  
0.01 … 0.6  
--  
3)  
3
• DC-13 at  
- 24 V  
A
A
A
A
A
1
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
- 48 V  
0.45  
0.35  
0.2  
0.1  
- 60 V  
- 110 V  
- 230 V  
4)  
DIAZED fuse  
gL/gG operational class  
A
4
--  
Switching frequency  
• When loaded with I 230 V AC  
1/h  
1/h  
2500  
5000  
5000  
50  
e
• When loaded with 3RT10 16 contactor, 230 V AC  
Recovery time  
ms  
ms  
mA  
150  
300  
--  
150  
5)  
6)  
Minimum ON period  
35  
--  
200  
Residual current  
with non-conducting output  
--  
--  
--  
5
Voltage drop  
with conducting output  
VA  
3.5  
Short-time loading capacity  
10  
(to 10 ms)  
Setting accuracy  
Typical –5 %  
ˆ –1%  
with reference to scale value  
Repeat accuracy  
6
6
Mechanical endurance  
Operating cycles  
30 x 10  
100 x 10  
Permissible ambient temperature  
During operation  
During storage  
°C  
°C  
-25 … +60  
-40 … +85  
Degree of protection  
acc. to EN 60529  
IP40 cover,  
IP20 terminals  
Conductor cross-sections  
• Screw-type connection (to connect Solid  
mm²  
mm²  
1 x (0.5 ... 4)  
1 or 2 conductors); for standard  
screwdriver (size 2 and Pozidriv 2) Finely stranded with end sleeve  
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
Terminal screw  
Tightening torque  
AWG 2 x (20 ... 14)  
M 3.5  
Nm  
0.8 … 1.2  
• Spring-loaded terminal  
Solid  
mm²  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
(to connect 1 or 2 conductors; for Finely stranded  
22.5 mm timing relay use  
screwdriver with 3 mm blade or  
8WA2 807 opening tool)  
• With end sleeve  
• Without end sleeve  
AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
mm²  
mm²  
2 x (0.25 ... 1)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
AWG 2 x (24 ... 16)  
Permissible  
Any  
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 for half-sine shock type  
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6  
g/ms 15/11  
Hz/mm 10 ... 55/0.35  
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)  
Tests acc. to basic specification  
EN 61000-6-2/EN 61000-6-4  
1) If nothing else is stated.  
2) Maximum inrush current 1A/100 ms.  
3) For 3RP15 05-.R: NC contact -> I = 1 A.  
e
4)  
I ˜ 1 kA weld-free acc. to IEC 60947-5-1  
k
5) Minimum ON period with 3RP15 05-.BW30, 150 ms, until instantaneous  
contact has switched.  
6) For correct operation, observe minimum ON period.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/50  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,  
22.5 mm  
Dimensional drawings  
5
86  
36  
NSB0_01606  
15  
15  
22,5  
22,5  
A
B
C
Type  
3RP15 1  
3RP15 05  
3RP15 25-.B  
3RP15 3  
3RP15 40-.B  
3RP15 60  
3RP15 25-.A  
3RP15 27  
3RP15 10-A  
3RP15 55  
3RP15 7  
Removable terminal  
Spring-loaded terminal  
Screw-type terminal  
84  
83  
94  
92  
103  
102  
Schematics  
3RP15 internal schematics (terminal designation to DIN 46199, Part 5)  
3RP15 05-.A  
3RP15 05-.A  
3RP15 3.-.A  
3RP15 05-.A  
3RP15 05-.A  
3RP15 1.  
3RP15 25-.A  
AC/DC24V  
AC100/127V  
AC/DC24V  
AC100/127V  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC200/240V  
AC200/240V  
A1B1A3 B3 15  
A1 B1A3 B3 15  
A1A3  
15  
A1 A3  
15  
A2  
16 18  
A2  
16 18  
A2 16 18  
A2 16 18  
ON-delay  
OFF-delay  
with auxiliary voltage  
ON-delay and OFF-delay  
with auxiliary voltage  
Flashing  
3RP15 05-.A  
3RP15 05-.A  
3RP15 05-.A  
3RP15 05-.A  
AC/DC24V  
AC100/127V  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC200/240V  
A1B1A3 B3 15  
A1B1A3 B3 15  
A1B1A3 B3 15  
A1A3  
15  
S
A2  
16 18  
A2  
16 18  
A2  
16 18  
A2 16 18  
Passing make contact  
Passing break contact  
with auxiliary voltage  
Pulse-forming  
with auxiliary voltage  
Additive ON-delay  
with auxiliary voltage  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/51  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,  
22.5 mm  
3RP15 27  
3RP15 40-.A  
3RP15 55  
3RP15 05-.AW30  
U = 24 ... 66 V AC/DC  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC42V...48V  
90 ... 240 V AC/DC  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC100/127V  
AC/DC200/240V  
AC/DC60V  
AC/DC 24-66V  
AC/DC 90-240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC/DC24...240V  
A1+  
A1 B1  
15  
A1  
15  
A1 A3  
15  
A2  
Last  
U
A2 16 18  
A2  
16 18  
A2  
16 18  
ON-delay,  
two-wire design  
OFF-delay  
without auxiliary voltage  
Clock-pulse relay  
Multi-function relay  
(same functions as 3RP15 05-1A)  
3RP15 05-.B, 3RP15 25-1B  
3RP15 05-.B  
3RP15 05-.B  
3RP15 05-.B  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
A1 B1A3 B3 15  
25  
A1A3  
15  
25  
A1A3  
15  
25  
A1B1A3 B3 15  
25  
A2  
16  
26  
28  
18  
A2 16 18 26 28  
A2 16 18 26 28  
A2  
16  
26  
28  
18  
ON-delay, 3RP15 25-1B  
also for 42...48/60 V AC/DC  
(see page 8/13 3RP15 25-1BR30)  
OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage  
ON-delay and OFF-delay  
with auxiliary voltage  
Flashing  
3RP15 05-.B  
3RP15 05-.B  
3RP15 05-.B  
3RP15 05-.B  
AC/DC24V  
AC100/127V  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC200/240V  
25  
A1B1A3 B3 15  
21  
25  
A1B1A3 B3 15  
A1B1A3 B3 15  
A1A3  
15  
25  
S
A2  
16 18 22 24  
A2  
16 18 26 28  
A2  
16 18 2628  
2628  
A2 16 18  
Passing make contact  
Passing break contact with  
auxiliary voltage  
Pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage  
Additive ON-delay with auxiliary  
voltage and instantaneous contact  
3RP15 05-.B  
3RP15 05-.B  
3RP15 05-.B  
3RP15 05-.B  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
A1 B1A3 B3 15  
21  
A1B1A3 B3 15  
21  
A1A3  
15  
21  
A1A3  
15  
21  
A2  
16  
22  
24  
18  
A2  
16  
22  
24  
18  
A2 16 18 22 24  
A2 16 18 22 24  
ON-delay and instantaneous  
contact  
OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage  
and instantaneous contact  
ON-delay and OFF-delay with  
auxiliary voltage and instantaneous  
contact  
Flashing and instantaneous contact  
3RP15 05-.B  
3RP15 05-.B  
3RP15 05-.B  
3RP15 05-.B  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
21  
21  
A1B1A3 B3 15  
A1B1A3 B3 15  
A1  
A3  
A1 A3  
15  
21  
17  
27  
A2  
Y18 d28  
A2  
16 18 22 24  
A2  
16 18 22 24  
A2 16 18 22 24  
Passing make contact  
and instantaneous contact  
Passing break contact with  
auxiliary voltage and instantaneous  
contact  
Pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage  
and instantaneous contact  
Wye-delta function  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/52  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,  
22.5 mm  
3RP15 05-.BW30/-1BT20/-.RW30  
3RP15 25-.BR30  
3RP15 25-. BW30  
3RP15 40-.B  
AC/DC42...48V  
A
C
/
D
C
2
4
V
A
C
/
D
C
2
4
.
.
.
2
4
0
V
A
C
/
D
C
1
0
0
/
1
2
7
V
A
C
4
0
0
/
4
4
0
V
A
C
/
D
C
2
0
0
/
2
4
0
V
AC/DC24...240V  
A1  
AC/DC60V  
1
5
/
1
7
2
1
/
2
5
/
2
7
A
A
1
1
B
1
1
A
1
1
5
8
2
2
5
8
15  
25  
A1 A3  
15  
25  
A
2
A
2
1
6
2
6
A2 16 18 26 28  
A2 16 18 26 28  
1
6
1
8
2
2
/
2
6
2
4
/
2
8
A
2
Multi-function relay  
(for functions see function table)  
ON-delay  
ON-delay  
OFF-delay without  
auxiliary voltage  
3RP15 60-.S  
3RP15 7.-.M20  
3RP15 74, 3RP15 76  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
A
C
2
0
0
/
2
4
0
V
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
C
3
8
0
/
4
4
0
V
A1 B1 A3 B3  
A2  
17  
A1 A3  
17  
A
1
A 3  
1
7
Y18 28 16  
A2  
Y18 d28  
A
2
Y
1
8
d
2
8
Wye-delta timing relay with  
overtravel function (idling)  
Wye-delta timing relay  
Wye-delta timing relay  
Position of the connection terminals  
3RP15 05-.A  
3RP15 05-.AA40  
3RP15 05-.AW  
3RP15 05-.BP/-.BQ  
3RP15 05-.BW  
3RP15 05-1BT  
15/  
15/  
17  
15/  
A1 B1  
A3 B3  
17  
A1 B1  
A1 B1  
17  
A1 B1 15  
A
1
B
1
1
5
15  
A1 B1  
21/  
25/  
27  
21/  
25/  
27  
21/  
25/  
27  
A
3
B
3
For 2 CO  
contacts  
For 1 CO  
contact  
For 2 CO  
contacts  
for 2  
changeover  
contact  
For 2 CO  
contacts  
f
o
r
1
c
c
h
a
n
g
e
o
v
e
r
o
n
t
a
c
t
22/  
26  
24/  
28  
22/  
26  
24/  
28  
22/  
26  
24/  
28  
16 18 A2  
16 18 A2  
16 18 A2  
16 18 A2  
1
6
1
8
A
2
16 18 A2  
NSB01008  
NSB00999  
NSB00999  
NSB01007  
N
S
B
0
0
9
9
6
NSB0_01605  
.
1)  
3RP15 05-.RW  
A1 B1 15  
25  
3RP15 1.  
3RP15 25-1A. or -1B.  
3RP15 27  
3RP15 3.  
A1  
15  
25  
1
5
A
1
B
1
A1 A3 15 A3  
A1  
A
3
B
3
A1 A3 15  
For 2 CO  
contacts  
For 1 NO  
contact  
f
o
r
1
For 1 CO  
contact  
For 1 CO  
contact  
For 2 CO  
contacts  
c
c
h
a
n
g
e
o
v
e
r
o
n
t
a
c
t
26 28  
16  
A2 26 28  
18  
A2  
NSB01003  
16 18 A2  
NSB01002  
NSB01001  
16 18 A2  
16 18 A2  
1
6
1
8
A
2
NSB01000  
N
S
B
0
0
9
9
6
3RP15 40  
3RP15 55  
3RP15 60  
3RP15 7.  
A
1
1
5
A1 B1 17  
B3  
A
1
1
5
A
1
2
5
A3  
A1 A3 17  
A1 A3 15  
f
o
r
1
f
o
r
2
For 1 NO  
contact  
For 1 NO  
contact  
For 1 CO  
contact  
c
c
h
a
n
g
e
o
v
e
r
c
c
h
a
n
g
e
o
v
e
r
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
n
t
a
c
t
s
1
6
A
2
2
6
2
8
A
A
2
2
1
8
16  
18 28 A2  
16 18 A2  
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
0
0
4
a
NSB01006  
NSB01001  
1
6
1
8
18 28 A2  
NSB01005  
Note: All the diagrams show the view onto the connection terminals.  
1) Depending on the version.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/53  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
3RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,  
22.5 mm  
3RP15 circuit diagrams  
Control circuits (example circuits)  
with 3RP15 74 and 3RP15 76 wye-delta timing relays  
Control circuit (example circuit)  
with 3RP15 60 wye-delta timing relays  
For pushbutton operation  
For maintained-contact operation  
Size S00 to S3  
Legend:  
S0 button "OFF"  
Size S00 to S3  
S1 button "ON"  
S maintained-contact button  
K1 line contactor  
L1(L+) AC 50Hz (DC ...V)  
F0  
L
1
(
L
+
)
A
C
5
0
H
z
(
D
C
)
.
.
.
V
AC 50Hz (DC) ...V  
L1(L+)  
K2 star contactor  
K3 delta contactor  
K4 timer or timing relay  
F
0
F0  
F1  
9
5
95  
96  
F
1
S1  
9
6
F0 fuse  
F1 overload relay  
S0  
P1 pressure switch  
S
S1  
4
4
44  
11  
K
1
K1  
18  
17  
18  
17  
28  
17  
16  
4
3
P1  
43  
17  
K4  
K4  
K2  
K4  
14  
12  
1
7
1
1
3
4
1
1
3
4
13  
14  
3
3
3
4
33  
K
4
K
1
K
2
K
3
K4  
K1 K2  
34  
2
8
1
8
28  
22  
21  
22  
K3  
K2  
4
2
2
2
21  
42  
22  
K
2
K
3
K2  
K3  
2
1
4
1
21  
41  
A1 B1  
A2  
A1 K3  
A2  
A1 K1  
A2  
A1  
A2  
K
4
K
1
K
3
K4  
K1  
K
2
K3  
K2  
N
(
L
)
N(L  
)
N
S
B
0
_
0
0
9
5
1
c
NSB00950a  
N(L  
)
NSB01126  
The contact element 17/18 is only closed in the star stage; the contact element is open in the delta stage as well as in the  
de-energized state.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/54  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
3RP20 timing relays, 45 mm  
Overview  
Function  
• Changes to the time setting ranges and the functions must be  
carried out in the de-energized state  
• Start input B1 or B3 must only be triggered when the supply  
voltage is applied  
Standards  
The timing relays comply with:  
• EN 60721-3-3 "Environmental conditions"  
• EN 61812-1/DIN VDE 0435 Part 2021 "Solid-state relays,  
timing relays"  
• EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 "Electromagnetic  
compatibility"  
• EN 60947-5-1; (VDE 0660 Part 200) "Low-voltage controlgear,  
switchgear and systems – Electromechanical controlgear"  
• EN 61140 "Safe electrical isolation"  
• The same potential must be applied to A1 and B1 or A3 and  
B3. With two-voltage version, only one voltage range must be  
connected  
• The activation of loads parallel to the start input is not  
permissible when using AC (see diagrams)  
• Surge suppression is integrated in the timing relay. This  
prevents the generation of voltage peaks on the supply  
voltage when the relay is switched on and off. No additional  
damping measures are necessary  
3RP20 timing relay, width 45 mm  
Timing relay with multifunction  
LED for indicating  
"Time relay excited"  
(left)  
The functions can be adjusted by means of rotary switches.  
Indicator labels can be used to adjust different functions of the  
3RP20 05 timing relay clearly and unmistakably.  
LED for indicating  
"Relay switched"  
Function  
(right)  
The corresponding labels can be ordered as an accessory.  
The same potential must be applied to terminals A. and B..  
switch  
Time setting  
Time setting  
range selector  
range adjuster,  
switch  
analog  
3RP20 05 with one changeover contact  
NSB0_01424  
Device labeling  
plate  
Corresponds to the functions of 3RP15 05-.A.  
3RP20 05 with two changeover contacts  
Accessories  
Corresponds to the functions of 3RP15 05-.B.  
Label set for marking the multifunction relay  
Parallel load on start input  
L1  
S1  
A1  
K2  
B1  
K1  
A2  
N
NSB00895  
L1  
K1  
S1  
A1  
K2  
B1  
K1  
A2  
N
NSB00896  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/55  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
3RP20 timing relays, 45 mm  
Technical specifications  
Type  
3RP20 05  
3RP20 25  
Rated insulation voltage  
Pollution degree 3  
V AC 300  
Overvoltage category III  
1)  
Operating range at excitation  
0.85 ... 1.1 x U with AC; 0.8 ... 1.25 x U with DC;  
0.95 ... 1.05 times rated frequency  
s
s
Rated power  
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz  
W
VA  
1
4
Rated operational current I  
e
• AC-15 at 230 V, 50 Hz  
• DC-13 at  
- 24 V  
A
3
A
A
A
A
A
1
- 48 V  
0.45  
0.35  
0.2  
0.1  
- 60 V  
- 110 V  
- 230 V  
2)  
DIAZED fuse  
gL/gG operational class  
A
4
Switching frequency  
• When loaded with I 230 V AC  
1/h  
1/h  
2500  
5000  
e
• When loaded with 3RT10 16 contactor, 230 V AC  
Recovery time  
ms  
ms  
150  
Minimum ON period  
35  
Setting accuracy  
with reference to scale value  
Typical –5 %  
Repeat accuracy  
ˆ –1%  
6
Mechanical endurance  
Operating cycles  
30 x 10  
Permissible ambient temperature  
During operation  
During storage  
°C  
°C  
-25 … +60  
-40 … +85  
Degree of protection  
acc. to EN 60529  
IP40 cover,  
IP20 terminals  
Conductor cross-sections  
• Screw-type connection (to connect Solid  
mm²  
mm²  
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)  
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)  
1 or 2 conductors); for standard  
screwdriver (size 2 and Pozidriv 2) Finely stranded with end sleeve  
AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
Terminal screw  
Tightening torque  
AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)  
M3  
Nm  
0.8 … 1.2  
• Spring-loaded terminal  
Solid  
mm²  
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)  
(to connect 1 or 2 conductors;  
for 22.5 mm timing relay use  
screwdriver with 3 mm blade or  
8WA2 807 opening tool)  
Finely stranded  
• With end sleeve  
• Without end sleeve  
AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
mm²  
mm²  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)  
AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)  
Mounting position (permissible)  
Any  
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 for half-sine shock type  
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6  
g/ms 15/11  
Hz/mm 10 ... 55/0.35  
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)  
Tests acc. to basic specification  
EN 61000-6-2/EN 61000-6-4  
1) If nothing else is stated.  
2)  
I
˜ 1 kA, weld-free acc. to IEC 60947-5-1.  
k
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/56  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
3RP20 timing relays, 45 mm  
Dimensional drawings  
S
I
E
M
E
N
S
5
3
5
4
5
6
8
5
Schematics  
3RP20 internal schematics (terminal designation to DIN 46199, Part 5)  
3RP20 05  
3RP20 25  
3RP20 05  
3RP20 05  
3RP20 05  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC100/127V  
AC/DC24V  
AC100/127V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC200/240V  
AC200/240V  
A1 B1A3 B3 15  
A1 A3  
15  
A1B1A3 B3 15  
A1A3  
15  
A2  
16 18  
A2 16 18  
A2  
16 18  
A2 16 18  
ON-delay  
OFF-delay  
with auxiliary voltage  
ON-delay and OFF-delay  
with auxiliary voltage  
Flashing  
3RP20 05  
AC/DC24V  
3RP20 05  
3RP20 05  
AC/DC24V  
AC/DC24V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
AC100/127V  
AC200/240V  
A1B1A3 B3 15  
A1B1A3 B3 15  
A1A3  
15  
A2  
16 18  
A2  
16 18  
A2 16 18  
Passing make contact  
Passing break contact  
with auxiliary voltage  
Pulse-forming  
with auxiliary voltage  
Position of the connection terminals  
3RP20 05-.A  
3RP20 25-.A  
3RP20 05-.BW30  
15/17 21/25/  
27  
B1  
A1  
1
5
A
3
A
1
1
5
A
3
A
1
16  
18 22/26 24/28 A2  
1
6
1
8
A
2
1
6
1
8
A
2
N
S
B
0
0
1
1
9
6
a
N
S
B
0
0
1
1
9
6
a
NSB0_01392  
Note: All the diagrams show the view onto the connection terminals.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/57  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
7PV timing relays for panel mounting  
Technical specifications  
Type  
7PV33 48  
V AC 250  
Rated insulation voltage  
Overvoltage category C to DIN VDE 0110  
Operating range of excitation  
+10 ... -15 %  
Rated power  
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz  
W
VA  
1
11  
Rated operational currents I  
AC-1 at AC 230 V, 50 Hz  
A
8
e
Switching frequency  
• When loaded with I 230 V AC  
1/h  
1/h  
600  
--  
e
• When loaded with 3RT16 contactor, AC 230 V  
Recovery time  
ms  
ms  
50  
50  
Minimum ON period  
Setting accuracy  
• With reference to upper limit of scale  
– 0.03 %  
– 10 ms  
Repeat accuracy  
– 0.03 %  
– 10 ms  
6
Mechanical endurance  
Operating cycles  
5 x 10  
Permissible ambient temperature  
During operation  
During storage  
°C  
°C  
-10 ... +60  
-30 ... +70  
Degree of protection  
acc. to EN 60529  
IP65  
Permissible mounting positions  
Any  
Dimensional drawings  
7PV33  
LZX:MT78750 socket accessory, for 7PV33  
NSB01127a  
1
,
5
N
S
B
0
_
0
0
2
8
2
b
48  
64  
70,4  
5,5  
14,5  
4
9
,
3
3
8
Panel cutout  
Control panel thickness 1 to 3,5 mm  
2
6
7PX9921 socket accessory with rear connection  
47  
20,5  
7
Frame for panel  
mounting  
45+0,6  
0
Positioning screw  
NSB01124a  
33  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/58  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
7PV timing relays for panel mounting  
Schematics  
7PV internal schematics (terminal designation according to DIN 46199, Part 5)  
7PV33 48-2AX34  
7PV33 48-2AX34  
7PV33 48-2AX34  
7PV33 48-2AX34  
AC/DC 24V  
2
11  
11  
AC/DC 24V  
2
11  
11  
AC/DC 24V  
2
11  
11  
AC/DC 24V  
2
11  
11  
2
2
2
2
AC110 - 240V  
AC110 - 240V  
AC110 - 240V  
AC110 - 240V  
2
11 5  
1
A1 B1 15  
2
11 5  
1
A1 B1 15  
2
11 5  
1
A1 B1 15  
2
11 5  
1
A1 B1 15  
A2  
10  
16 18  
3
A2  
10  
16 18  
3
A2  
10  
A2  
10  
16 18  
16 18  
4
4
4
3
4
3
ON-delay (A)  
OFF-delay with  
auxiliary voltage (C)  
Passing make contact (H)  
Pulse-forming with  
auxiliary voltage (B)  
7PV33 48-2AX34  
7PV33 48-2AX34  
AC/DC 24V  
2
11  
11  
AC/DC 24V  
2
11  
11  
2
2
AC110 - 240V  
AC110 - 240V  
2
A1 B1 15  
11 5  
1
2
A1 B1 15  
11 5  
1
. Important!  
A2  
10  
16 18  
4
A2  
10  
16 18  
4
3
3
The terminal designations for 7PV are different from the  
designations for the 3RP1 terminals.  
Flashing, starting with interval (D)  
Flashing, starting with pulse (Di)  
Position of the connection terminals  
LZX: MT78750 socket  
for 7PV33 timing relays  
7PX9 921 socket  
for 7PV33 timing relays  
9
8
7
5
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
B
1
1
8
1
6
1
6
B
1
A
2
1
5
A
1
1
8
A
1
1
5
A
2
1
0
1
1
6
1
2
3
2
1
1
1
1
0
9
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
1
2
1
b
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
1
2
2
b
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/59  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
3RT19 timing relays for mounting to contactors  
Technical specifications  
According to IEC 61 812-1/DIN VDE 0435 Part 2021  
Type  
3RT19 16-2C  
3RT19 16-2D  
3RT19 26-2C  
3RT19 26-2D  
3RT19 16-2E  
3RT19 16-2F  
3RT19 16-2G  
3RT19 16-2L  
3RT19 26-2E  
3RT19 26-2F  
3RT19 26-2G  
Rated insulation voltage  
V AC  
300  
Pollution degree 3  
Overvoltage category III to DIN VDE 0110  
Operating range of excitation  
0.8...1.1 x U ,  
0.85...1.1 x U ,  
s
s
0.95 ... 1.05 times rated frequency 0.95 ... 1.05 times rated frequency  
Rated power  
• Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz  
W
VA  
1
1
2 (1 W for 3RT1916-2L)  
4
Rated operational currents I  
e
• AC-14 and DC-13  
A
0.3 for 3RT1916  
--  
0.5 for 3RT1926  
• AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz  
• DC-13 at 24 V  
• DC-13 at 110 V  
• DC-13 at 230 V  
A
A
A
A
--  
--  
--  
--  
3
1
0.2  
0.1  
DIAZED fuse  
gL/gG operational class  
A
--  
4
Switching frequency  
• When loaded with I 230 V AC  
1/h  
1/h  
2500  
2500  
2500  
5000  
e
• When loaded with 3RT1016 contactor, 230 V AC  
Recovery time  
ms  
ms  
50  
35  
150  
Minimum ON period  
200 (OFF-delay,  
without auxiliary voltage)  
3RT1916-2L: 35 (OFF-delay,  
with auxiliary voltage)  
Residual current  
(two-wire)  
mA  
VA  
A
ˆ 5  
--  
--  
--  
Voltage drop  
ˆ 3.5  
with conducting output  
Short-time loading capacity  
10 (to 10 ms)  
Setting accuracy  
with reference to upper limit of scale  
ˆ –15 %  
Repeat accuracy  
ˆ –1%  
6
6
Mechanical endurance  
Operating cycles  
100 x 10  
10 x 10  
Permissible ambient temperature  
During operation  
During storage  
°C  
°C  
-25 ... +60  
-40 ... +85  
Degree of protection  
acc. to EN 60529  
IP 40 cover  
IP 20 terminals  
Connection of conductors  
Solid  
mm²  
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5),  
2 x (0.75 ... 4)  
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
2 x (18 ... 14)  
Finely stranded with end sleeve  
Solid or stranded  
mm²  
AWG  
Terminal screw  
M3  
Tightening torque  
Nm  
0.8 ... 1.2  
Any  
Permissible mounting position  
Shock resistance  
Half sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-27  
g/ms  
15/11  
Vibration resistance  
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6  
Hz/mm  
10 ... 55 / 0.35  
EMC tests  
IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4  
Integrated into timing relay  
acc. to basic specification  
Overvoltage protection  
Varistor  
Integrated into 3RT19 16  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/60  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
3RT19 timing relays for mounting to contactors  
Dimensional drawings  
3RT19 16-2E, -2F, -2G, -2L  
solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks  
for size S00 contactors and contactor relays  
3RT19 26-2C  
mountable on top or bottom of the contactors for size S0 to S3  
45  
41  
4
50  
6
5 9  
75  
45  
3RT19 26-2E, -2F, -2G  
for size S0 to S3 contactors and contactor relays  
3RT19 16-2D solid-state time-delay blocks, OFF-delay  
for mounting onto the front of size S00 contactors  
73  
5 12  
33  
9
5
38  
45  
3RT19 16-2C solid-state time-delay blocks, ON-delay  
for mounting onto the front of size S00 contactors  
3RT19 26-2D  
mountable on top or bottom of the contactors for size S0 to S3  
45  
41  
6
11  
4
50  
45  
38  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/61  
3RP, 7PV Timing Relays  
3RT19 timing relays for mounting to contactors  
Schematics  
3RT19 circuit diagrams  
Control circuits (example circuits)  
with delayed 3RT19 .6-2G wye-delta auxiliary switch block  
For pushbutton operation  
Size S00  
AC 50Hz (DC) ...V  
L1(L+)  
Sizes S0 to S3  
AC 50Hz ...V  
L1(L+)  
F0  
F1  
95  
96  
F0  
F1  
95  
96  
S0  
S0  
S1  
S1  
13  
14  
(.3)  
(.4)  
K1  
K1  
37  
38  
27  
28  
(.3)  
(.4)  
(.3)  
K4  
K1 K2  
(.4)  
38  
37  
27  
28  
K4  
22  
22  
21  
K2  
K3  
(.2)  
(.2)  
21  
K2  
K3  
(.1)  
(.1)  
K4  
K1  
K3  
K2  
K4  
K2  
K3  
K1  
N(L  
)
N(L  
)
NSB00947  
NSB00946a  
For maintained-contact operation  
Size S00  
Sizes S0 to S3  
AC 50Hz (DC) ...V  
L1(L+)  
AC 50Hz ...V  
L1(L+)  
Legend:  
F0  
F1  
95  
96  
F0  
F1  
95  
96  
S0 "OFF" button  
S1 "ON" button  
S
Maintained-contact switch  
S
S
13  
14  
K1  
K1 Line contactor  
K2 Star contactor  
(.3)  
(.3)  
13  
14  
37  
38  
27  
28  
K1 K2  
(.4)  
K3  
(.4)  
38  
37  
27  
28  
K4  
K3 Delta contactor  
K4 Timer or timing relay  
K4  
22  
22  
21  
(.2)  
(.2)  
K2  
K3  
K2  
K3  
K3  
21  
(.1)  
(.1)  
F0 Fuse  
K4  
K1  
K3  
K2  
K4  
K2  
K1  
F1 Overload relay  
N(L  
)
N(L  
)
NSB00948a  
NSB0_00949a  
The 27/28 contact element for the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block with wye-delta function is  
only closed on the delta level; the contact element is open in the delta stage as well as in the de-energized  
state.  
Solid-state timing relay blocks  
for size S00 to S3 3RT10 contactors and 3RH11 contactor relays  
3RT19 16-2C...  
L1/L+  
3RT19 26-2C...  
L1/L+  
3RT19 16-2D.../3RT19 26-2D...  
L1/L+  
$ Timing relay block  
% Contactor  
--- Can be connected  
S1  
Do not connect!  
A1  
1
A2  
A1  
A1 B1  
A2  
1
2
1
2
A1  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A1  
A1  
A2  
A2  
A1  
A1  
2
A1  
N/L  
N/L  
N/L  
ON-delay  
ON-delay  
OFF-delay  
(with auxiliary voltage)  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/62  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Line monitoring  
Overview  
Solid-state line monitoring relays provide maximum protection  
for mobile machines and plants or for unstable networks.  
Network and voltage faults can be detected early and rectified  
before far greater damage ensues.  
Depending on the version, the relays monitor phase sequence,  
phase failure with and without N conductor monitoring, phase  
unbalance, undervoltage or overvoltage. With the 3UG46 17  
or 3UG46 18 relay, a wrong direction of rotation can also be  
corrected automatically.  
Function  
3UG45 11 monitoring relays  
3UG45 12 monitoring relays  
The 3UG45 11 phase sequenced relay monitors the phase  
sequence in a three-phase network. No adjustments are  
required for operation. The device has an internal power supply  
and works using the closed-circuit principle. If the phase  
sequence at the terminals L1-L2-L3 is correct, the output relay  
picks up after the delay time has elapsed and the LED is lit. If the  
phase sequence is wrong, the output relays remain in their rest  
position.  
The 3UG45 12 line monitoring relay monitors three-phase  
networks with regard to phase sequence, phase failure and  
phase unbalance of 10 %. Thanks to a special measuring  
method, a phase failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide  
voltage range from 160 to 690 V AC and feedback through the  
load of up to 90 %. The device has an internal power supply and  
works using the closed-circuit principle. No adjustments are  
required. When the mains supply is switched on, the green LED  
is lit. If the phase sequence at the terminals L1-L2-L3 is correct,  
the output relay picks up. If the phase sequence is wrong, the  
red LED flashes and the output relay remains in its rest position.  
If a phase fails, the red LED is permanently lit and the output  
relay drops.  
Note:  
When one phase fails, connected loads (motor windings, lamps,  
transformers, coils, etc.) create a feedback voltage at the  
terminal of the failed phase due to the network coupling.  
Because the 3UG45 11 relays are not resistant to voltage  
feedback, such a phase failure is not detected. Should this be  
required, then the 3UG45 12 monitoring relay must be used.  
Note:  
The red LED is a fault diagnostic indicator and does not show the  
current relay status. The 3UG45 12 monitoring relay is suitable  
for line frequencies of 50/60 Hz.  
Correct phase sequence  
Phase failure  
L1-L2-L3  
11/14  
L1-L2-L3  
L2-L3  
L1-L2-L3  
ON  
11/12  
21/24  
21/22  
11/14  
11/12  
Wrong phase sequence  
21/24  
21/22  
LED rd  
L3-L2-L1  
11/14  
OFF  
ON  
Phase loss  
OFF  
11/12  
OFF  
Wrong phase sequence  
21/24  
21/22  
L3-L2-L1  
11/14  
11/12  
21/24  
21/22  
LED rd  
OFF  
FLASH  
OFF  
Phase sequence  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/63  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Line monitoring  
3UG45 13 monitoring relays  
3UG46 14 monitoring relays  
The 3UG45 13 line monitoring relay monitors three-phase  
networks with regard to phase sequence, phase failure, phase  
unbalance of 20 % and undervoltage. The device has an internal  
power supply and works using the closed-circuit principle. The  
hysteresis is 5 %. The integrated response delay time is  
adjustable from 0 to 20 s and responds to undervoltage. If the  
direction is incorrect, the device switches off immediately.  
Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase failure is reliably  
detected in spite of the wide voltage range from 160 to 690 V AC  
and feedback through the load of up to 80 %. When the mains  
supply is switched on, the green LED is lit. If the phase  
The 3UG46 14 line monitoring relay has a wide voltage range  
and an internal power supply. The device is equipped with a  
display and is parameterized using three buttons. It monitors  
three-phase networks with regard to phase unbalance from 5 to  
20 %, phase failure, undervoltage and phase sequence. The  
hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to 20 V. In addition, the device  
has a response delay and ON delay from 0 to 20 s in each case.  
The integrated response delay time responds to phase  
unbalance and undervoltage. If the direction is incorrect, the  
device switches off immediately. Thanks to a special measuring  
method, a phase failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide  
voltage range from 160 to 690 V AC and feedback through the  
load.  
sequence at the terminals L1-L2-L3 is correct, the output relay  
picks up. If the phase sequence is wrong, the red LED flashes  
and the output relay remains in its rest position. If a phase fails,  
the red LED is permanently lit and the output relay drops.  
The 3UG46 14 monitoring relay can be operated on the basis of  
either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and with  
manual or auto RESET.  
Note:  
The red LED is a fault diagnostic indicator and does not show the  
current relay status. The 3UG45 13 monitoring relay is suitable  
for line frequencies of 50/60 Hz.  
With the closed-circuit principle selected  
Wrong phase sequence  
Phase failure and undervoltage  
L3-L2-L1  
11/14  
11/12  
L1-L2-L3  
3~Un  
L2-L3  
L1-L2-L3  
Hysteresis  
5%  
-20%  
21/24  
21/22  
11/14  
11/12  
Phase failure  
21/24  
21/22  
LED rd  
L1-L2-L3  
L2-L3  
L1-L2-L3  
NSB0_01569  
OFF  
ON  
Phase loss  
OFF  
Delay  
ON  
OFF  
11/14  
11/12  
Wrong phase sequence  
21/24  
21/22  
L3-L2-L1  
Undervoltage  
11/14  
11/12  
<
Hysteresis  
x-y  
21/24  
21/22  
11/14  
11/12  
LED rd  
OFF  
FLASH  
Phase sequence  
OFF  
21/24  
21/22  
Delay  
onDelay  
Unbalance  
Hysteresis  
2%  
> Asy  
0%  
11/14  
11/12  
21/24  
21/22  
Delay  
onDelay  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/64  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Line monitoring  
3UG46 15/3UG46 16 monitoring relays  
3UG46 17/3UG46 18 monitoring relays  
The 3UG46 15/3UG46 16 line monitoring relay has a wide  
voltage range and an internal power supply. The device is  
equipped with a display and is parameterized using three  
buttons. The 3UG46 15 device monitors three-phase networks  
with regard to phase failure, undervoltage, overvoltage and  
phase sequence. The 3UG46 16 monitoring relay monitors the  
neutral conductor as well. The hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to  
20 V. In addition the device has two separately adjustable delay  
times for overvoltage and undervoltage from 0 to 20 s in each  
case. If the direction is incorrect, the device switches off  
immediately. Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase  
failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide voltage range from  
160 to 690 V AC and feedback through the load of up to 80 %.  
The 3UG46 17/ 3UG46 18 line monitoring relay has an internal  
power supply and can automatically correct a wrong direction of  
rotation. Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase failure  
is reliably detected in spite of the wide voltage range from 160  
to 690 V AC and feedback through the load of up to 80 %. The  
device is equipped with a display and is parameterized using  
three buttons. The 3UG46 17 line monitoring relay monitors  
three-phase networks with regard to phase sequence, phase  
failure, phase unbalance, undervoltage and overvoltage. The  
3UG46 18 monitoring relay monitors the neutral conductor as  
well. The hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to 20 V. In addition the  
device has delay times from 0 to 20 s in each case. The times  
respond to overvoltage, undervoltage, phase failure and phase  
unbalance. The 3UG46 17/3UG46 18 monitoring relay can be  
operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit  
principle and with manual or auto RESET.  
The 3UG46 15/3UG46 16 monitoring relay can be operated on  
the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and  
with manual or auto RESET.  
The one changeover contact is used for warning or switching off  
in the event of line faults (voltage, unbalance), the other  
responds only to a wrong phase sequence. In conjunction with  
a contactor reversing assembly it is thus possible to change the  
direction automatically.  
With the closed-circuit principle selected  
Wrong phase sequence  
L3-L2-L1  
With the closed-circuit principle selected  
Phase failure  
11/14  
11/12  
21/24  
21/22  
L1-L2-L3  
L1-L2-L3-N L1-L2-L3 L1-L2-L3-N  
L2-L3  
L1-L2-L3  
Phase failure  
11/14  
11/12  
L1-L2-L3  
L2-L3  
L1-L2-L3  
50 ms  
L1-L2-L3-N L1-L2-L3 L1-L2-L3-N  
21/24  
21/22  
11/14  
11/12  
Undervoltage  
Hysteresis  
<
x-y  
21/24  
21/22  
11/14  
11/12  
Undervoltage  
50 ms  
21/24  
21/22  
Hysteresis  
<
x-y  
Delay  
11/14  
11/12  
Overvoltage  
>
Hysteresis  
x-y  
21/24  
21/22  
11/14  
11/12  
Delay  
Overvoltage  
50 ms  
21/24  
21/22  
>
Hysteresis  
x-y  
Delay  
Unbalance  
11/14  
11/12  
Hysteresis  
2 %  
> Asy  
0 %  
21/24  
21/22  
11/14  
11/12  
Delay  
50 ms  
21/24  
21/22  
Delay  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/65  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Line monitoring  
Technical specifications  
3UG45 11- 3UG45 11- 3UG45 11- 3UG45 12  
..N20 ..P20 ..Q20  
3UG45 13  
3UG46 14  
3UG46 15  
3UG46 16  
3UG46 17  
3UG46 18  
General data  
V
160 … 260 320 … 500 420 … 690 160 … 690  
50/60  
Rated control supply voltage U  
Rated frequency  
s
Hz  
Rated output, typical  
• At 230 V AC  
W/VA 2/4  
W/VA --  
W/VA --  
--  
2/8  
--  
--  
2/2.5  
2/3.5  
2/4  
• At 400 V AC  
--  
• At 460 V AC  
2/8  
Width  
mm  
22.5  
--  
RESET  
automatic/manual  
Function principle  
Closed-circuit  
Closed-circuit, open-  
circuit (3UG46 17/  
3UG46 18: closed-circuit)  
Availability time after application of U  
ms  
ms  
s
200  
300  
--  
1000  
30  
s
Response time on occurrence of a fault  
Adjustable tripping delay time  
Adjustable ON-delay time  
0.1 ... 20  
s
--  
0.1 … 20  
--  
Mains buffering time, typical  
ms  
V
10  
Rated insulation voltage U  
690  
i
Degree of pollution 3  
Overvoltage category III acc. to VDE 0110  
Rated impulse withstand voltage  
kV  
6
Permissible ambient temperature  
• During operation  
°C  
°C  
-25 … +60  
-40 … +85  
• During storage  
1)  
EMC tests  
IEC 60947-1/IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4  
Degree of protection  
• Enclosures  
IP40  
IP20  
2
• Terminals  
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6  
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27  
Hz/mm 1-6/15; 6-500, 20 m/s  
g/ms 15/11  
Conductor cross-section  
Screw-type connection  
- Solid  
- Finely stranded with end sleeve  
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
- Tightening torque  
M 3 (standard screwdriver size 2 and Pozidriv 2)  
1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
2
2
mm  
mm  
AWG 2 x (20 ... 14)  
Nm  
mm  
0.8 … 1.2  
Spring-loaded terminals  
- Solid  
2
2
2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves acc. to DIN 46228 mm  
- Finely stranded  
mm  
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
AWG 2 x (24 ... 16)  
Measuring circuits  
Measuring range  
V
160 ... 260 320 ... 500 420 ... 690 160 ... 690  
Setting range  
V
200...690  
160...690  
Measuring accuracy  
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters  
Setting accuracy  
%
%
--  
--  
--  
5
1
–10 %  
–1 V  
referred to  
upper limit  
of effective  
range  
Accuracy of digital display  
Deviations for temperature deviations  
Hysteresis for voltage  
--  
1 digit  
%/°C --  
0.1  
V
--  
--  
--  
5 % of  
1 ... 20 V  
upper limit  
of effective  
range  
Hysteresis for unbalance  
%
2 % of limit 2 % of limit  
value  
value for  
3UG46 17/  
3UG46 18  
Deviation for frequency fluctuation  
%
1 %  
1) Note: This is a Class A product. In the household environment this device  
may cause radio interference. In this case the user must introduce  
suitable measures.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/66  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Line monitoring  
k
3UG45 11- 3UG45 11- 3UG45 11- 3UG45 12  
3UG45 13  
3UG46 14  
3UG46 15  
3UG46 16  
3UG46 17  
3UG46 18  
..N20  
..P20  
..Q20  
Control circuits  
Load capacity of the output relay  
• Thermal current limit I  
A
5
th  
Rated operational current I at  
• AC-15/230 V/400 V  
• DC-13/24 V  
• DC-13/110 V  
• DC-13/230 V  
e
A
A
A
A
3
1
0.2  
0.1  
Minimum contact load at 17 V DC  
mA  
A
5
4
Output relay with DIAZED fuse  
gl/Gg operational class  
Electrical endurance AC-15  
Million 0.1  
operat-  
ing  
cycles  
Mechanical endurance  
Million 10  
operat-  
ing  
cycles  
Dimensional drawings  
5
86  
36  
NSB0_01606  
15  
15  
22,5  
22,5  
A
B
C
Type  
3UG45 11-.A  
3UG45 12-.A  
3UG45 11-.B  
3UG45 12-.B  
3UG45 13  
3UG46 14  
3UG46 15  
3UG46 17  
3UG46 16  
3UG46 18  
Removable terminal  
Spring-loaded  
terminal  
84  
83  
94  
92  
103  
102  
Screw-type  
connection  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/67  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Line monitoring  
Schematics  
3UG45 11-.A  
3UG45 12-.A  
3UG45 11-.B  
3UG45 12-.B  
3UG45 13  
3UG46 14  
3UG46 15  
3UG46 17  
3UG46 16  
3UG46 18  
L
1
L
1
L
1
L
2
L
2
L
2
L
3
L
3
L
3
N
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
1
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
1
2
1
N
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
1
2
1
3
U
G
4
3
U
G
4
3
U
G
4
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
5
3
7
a
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
5
3
6
a
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
5
3
8
a
1
2
1
4
1
2
1
4
2
2
2
4
1
2
1
4
2
2
2
4
Position of the connection terminals  
3UG45 11-.A  
3UG45 12-.A  
3UG45 11-.B  
3UG45 12-.B  
3UG45 13  
3UG46 14  
3UG46 15  
3UG46 17  
3UG46 16  
3UG46 18  
L
1
L
2
L
3
N
L
1
L
2
L
3
L
1
L
2
L
3
1
2
1
1
1
4
1
2
1
1
1
2
4
4
1
2
1
1
1
2
4
4
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/68  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Voltage monitoring  
Overview  
The relays monitor single-phase AC and DC voltages against the  
set threshold for overshoot and undershoot. The products differ  
with regard to their power supply (internal or external).  
Function  
3UG46 33 monitoring relays  
Undervoltage  
The 3UG46 33 voltage monitoring relay has an internal power  
supply and performs overshoot, undershoot or window  
monitoring of the voltage depending on how it is parameterized.  
The device is equipped with a display and is parameterized  
using three buttons.  
A1-A2 =  
<
Hysteresis  
= 0  
The operating and measuring range extends from 17 V to 275 V  
AC/DC. The threshold values for overshoot or undershoot can be  
freely configured within this range. If one of these threshold  
values is reached, the output relay responds according to the  
set principle of operation as soon as the tripping delay time has  
11/14  
11/12  
onDelay  
Delay  
elapsed. This delay time U can be set from 0.1 to 20 s like the  
Del  
Window monitoring  
ON-delay time on  
.
Del  
The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.1 to 150 V. The device can be  
operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit  
principle and with manual or auto RESET. One output  
changeover contact is available as signaling contact.  
A1-A2 =  
>
<
Hysteresis  
Hysteresis  
With the closed-circuit principle selected  
Overvoltage  
= 0  
11/14  
11/12  
A1-A2 =  
>
onDelay  
Delay  
Delay  
Hysteresis  
= 0  
Delay =  
Delay  
11/14  
11/12  
onDelay  
Delay  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/69  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Voltage monitoring  
3UG46 31/3UG46 32 monitoring relays  
Undervoltage  
The 3UG46 31/3UG46 32 voltage monitoring relay is supplied  
with an auxiliary voltage of 24 V AC/DC or 24 to 240 V AC/DC  
and performs overshoot, undershoot or window monitoring of  
the voltage depending on how it is parameterized. The device is  
equipped with a display and is parameterized using three  
buttons.  
A1-A2  
<
Hysteresis  
= 0  
The measuring range extends from 0.1 V to 60 V or from  
10 to 600 V AC/DC. The threshold values for overshoot or  
undershoot can be freely configured within this range. If one of  
these threshold values is reached, the output relay responds  
according to the set principle of operation as soon as the delay  
11/14  
11/12  
Delay  
time has elapsed. This delay time U can be set from 0.1 to  
Del  
20 s.  
Window monitoring  
The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.1 to 30 V or 0.1 to 300 V. The  
device can be operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or  
closed-circuit principle and with manual or auto RESET. One  
output changeover contact is available as signaling contact.  
A1-A2  
With the closed-circuit principle selected  
Overvoltage  
>
<
Hysteresis  
Hysteresis  
A1-A2  
= 0  
11/14  
11/12  
>
Hysteresis  
= 0  
Delay  
Delay  
11/14  
11/12  
Delay =  
Delay  
Delay  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/70  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Voltage monitoring  
Technical specifications  
3UG46 31-  
.AA  
3UG46 31-  
.AW  
3UG46 32-  
.AA  
3UG46 32-  
.AW  
3UG46 33  
General data  
Rated control supply voltage U  
V
24  
AC/DC  
24 ... 240  
AC/DC  
24  
AC/DC  
24 ... 240  
AC/DC  
17 ... 275  
AC/DC  
s
Rated frequency for AC  
Operating range  
Rated output  
Width  
Hz  
V
50/60  
40 ... 500  
17 ... 275  
20.4 ... 27.6 20.4 ... 275  
20.4 ... 27.6 20.4 ... 275  
VA  
mm  
2/4  
22.5  
RESET  
Automatic/manual  
Availability time after application of U  
ms  
ms  
s
1000  
300  
s
Response time on occurrence of a fault  
Adjustable tripping delay time  
Adjustable ON-delay time  
0.1 … 20  
--  
s
0.1 ... 20  
300  
Mains buffering time, typical  
ms  
V
10  
Rated insulation voltage U  
300  
--  
690  
6
i
Pollution degree 3  
Overvoltage category III acc. to VDE 0110  
Rated impulse withstand voltage U  
kV  
4
4
imp  
Permissible ambient temperature  
• During operation  
°C  
°C  
-25 … +60  
-40 … +85  
• During storage  
1)  
EMC tests  
IEC 60947-1/IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4  
Degree of protection  
• Enclosures  
• Terminals  
IP40  
IP20  
2
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6  
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27  
Hz/mm  
g/ms  
1-6/1S; 6-500, 20 m/s  
15/11  
Conductor cross-section  
Screw-type connection  
- Solid  
- Finely stranded with end sleeve  
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
- Tightening torque  
M 3 (standard screwdriver size 2 and Pozidriv 2)  
1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
2 x (20 ... 14)  
2
mm  
2
mm  
AWG  
Nm  
0.8 … 1.2  
Spring-loaded terminals  
- Solid  
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves acc. to DIN 46228  
- Finely stranded  
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
2
mm  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 x (24 ... 16)  
2
2
mm  
mm  
AWG  
Measuring circuits  
Permissible measuring range single-phase AC/DC voltage  
Setting range single-phase voltage  
Measuring frequency  
V
0.1 ... 90  
0.1 ... 60  
40 ... 500  
5
10 ... 650  
10 ... 600  
17 ... 275  
17 ... 275  
40 ... 500  
V
Hz  
%
%
Measuring accuracy  
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters  
Accuracy of digital display  
1
–1 digit  
–1  
Deviations for temperature fluctuations  
Hysteresis for single-phase voltage  
Control circuits  
%/°C  
V
0.1 ... 30  
0.1 ... 300  
0.1 ... 150  
Load capacity of the output relay  
• Thermal current limit I  
th  
A
5
Rated operational current I at  
• AC-15 230/400 V  
• DC-13 24 V  
• DC-13 110 V  
• DC-13 230 V  
e
A
A
A
A
3
1
0.2  
0.1  
Minimum contact load at 17 V DC  
mA  
A
5
4
Output relay with DIAZED fuse  
gl/Gg operational class  
Electrical endurance AC-15  
Million  
operating  
cycles  
0.1  
10  
Endurance with contactor relay  
Million  
operating  
cycles  
1) Note: This is a Class A product. In the household environment this device  
may cause radio interference. In this case the user must introduce  
suitable measures.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/71  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Voltage monitoring  
Dimensional drawings  
5
86  
36  
NSB0_01606  
15  
15  
22,5  
22,5  
B
Type  
3UG46 31  
3UG46 32  
3UG46 33  
Removable terminals  
Spring-loaded terminal  
Screw-type connection  
94  
92  
Schematics  
3UG46 31  
3UG46 32  
3UG46 31-.AW30  
3UG46 32-.AW30  
3UG46 33  
AC/DC  
A
C
/
D
C
A
C
/
D C  
A1(+) IN(+)  
A
1
(
+
)
I
N
(
+
)
1
1
1
1
I
N
(
+
)
11  
<
U
>
<
U
>
< U >  
A
2
(
+
)
M
(
-
)
1
2
1
4
12 14  
M
(
-
)
1
2
1
4
A2(–) M(–)  
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
5
3
2
a
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
5
3
3
a
NSB0_01614  
Position of the connection terminals  
3UG46 31  
3UG46 32  
3UG46 33  
A
1
I
N
M
A
1
A
2
A
2
1
2
1
4
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/72  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Current monitoring  
Overview  
The relays monitor single-phase AC and DC currents against the  
set threshold for overshoot and undershoot. They differ with  
regard to their measuring ranges and supply voltage types.  
Function  
3UG46 21/3UG46 22 monitoring relays  
The 3UG46 21/3UG46 22 current monitoring relay is supplied  
with an auxiliary voltage of 24 V AC/DC or 24 to 240 V AC/DC  
and performs overshoot, undershoot or window monitoring of  
the current depending on how it is parameterized. The device is  
equipped with a display and is parameterized using three  
buttons.  
Current undershoot  
A1-A2  
<
The measuring range extends from 3 to 500 mA or 0.05 to 10 A.  
The threshold values for overshoot or undershoot can be freely  
configured within this range. If one of these threshold values is  
reached, the output relay responds according to the set  
Hysteresis  
= 0  
principle of operation as soon as the tripping delay time I has  
Del  
elapsed. This time and the ON-delay time on are adjustable  
Del  
11/14  
11/12  
from 0.1 to 20 s.  
The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.1 to 250 mA or 0.01 to 5 A.  
The device can be operated on the basis of either the open-  
circuit or closed-circuit principle and with manual or auto RESET.  
One output changeover contact is available as signaling  
contact.  
onDelay  
Delay  
Window monitoring  
With the closed-circuit principle selected  
Current overshoot  
A1-A2  
A1-A2  
>
<
>
Hysteresis  
Hysteresis  
Hysteresis  
= 0  
11/14  
11/12  
= 0  
11/14  
11/12  
onDelay  
Delay  
Delay  
Delay  
Delay =  
onDelay  
Delay  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/73  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Current monitoring  
Technical specifications  
3UG46 21-.AA  
3UG46 21-.AW 3UG46 22-.AA  
24 … 240 24  
3UG46 22-.AW  
General data  
Rated control supply voltage U  
Rated frequency  
Operating range  
Rated power  
V
24  
24 … 240  
s
Hz  
V
50/60  
20.4 ... 26.4  
VA  
mm  
2/4  
Width  
22.5  
RESET  
Automatic/manual  
Availability time after application of U  
ms  
ms  
s
1000  
s
Response time on occurrence of a fault  
Adjustable tripping delay time  
Adjustable ON-delay time  
300  
0.1 … 20  
0.1 … 20  
10  
s
Mains buffering time, typical  
ms  
V
Rated insulation voltage U  
300  
i
Degree of pollution 3  
Overvoltage category III acc. to VDE 0110  
Rated impulse withstand voltage U  
kV  
4
imp  
Permissible ambient temperature  
• During operation  
°C  
°C  
-25 … +60  
-40 … +85  
• During storage  
1)  
EMC tests  
IEC 60947-1/IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4  
Degree of protection  
• Enclosures  
IP40  
IP20  
2
• Terminals  
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6  
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27  
Hz/mm 1-6/15; 6-500.20 m/s  
g/ms  
15/11  
Conductor cross-section  
Screw-type connection  
- Solid  
- Finely stranded with end sleeve  
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
- Tightening torque  
M 3 (standard screwdriver size 2 and Pozidriv 2)  
1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
2 x (20 ... 14)  
2
2
mm  
mm  
AWG  
Nm  
0.8 … 1.2  
Spring-loaded terminals  
- Solid  
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves acc. to DIN 46228  
- Finely stranded  
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
2
2
2
mm  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 x (24 ... 16)  
mm  
mm  
AWG  
Measuring circuit  
Measuring range for single-phase AC/DC current  
Setting range for single-phase current  
Measuring accuracy  
A
0.003 ... 0.6  
0.003 ... 0.5  
5
0.05 ... 15  
0.05 ... 10  
A
%
%
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters  
Accuracy of digital display  
1
– 1 digit  
– 0.1  
Deviations for temperature fluctuations  
Hysteresis for single-phase current  
Control circuit  
%/°C  
0.1 ... 250 mA  
0.01 ... 5 A  
Load capacity of the output relay  
• Thermal current limit I  
A
5
th  
Rated operational current I at  
• AC-15 230/ 400 V  
• DC-13 24 V  
• DC-13 110 V  
• DC-13 230 V  
e
A
A
A
A
3
1
0.2  
0.1  
Minimum contact load at 17 V DC  
mA  
A
5
4
Output relay for DIAZED fuse  
gl/Gg operational class  
Electrical endurance AC-15  
Million 0.1  
operat-  
ing  
cycles  
Endurance with contactor relay  
Million 10  
operat-  
ing  
cycles  
1) Note: This is a Class A product. In the household environment this device  
may cause radio interference. In this case the user must introduce  
suitable measures.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/74  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Current monitoring  
Dimensional drawings  
5
86  
36  
NSB0_01606  
15  
15  
22,5  
22,5  
B
Type  
3UG46 21  
3UG46 22  
Removable terminals  
Spring-loaded terminal  
Screw-type terminal  
94  
92  
Schematics  
3UG46 21-.AA30  
3UG46 22-.AA30  
3UG46 21-.AW30  
3UG46 22-.AW30  
AC/DC  
ULoad  
Load  
AC/DC  
ULoad  
Load  
A1(+) IN(+)  
A1(+) IN(+)  
11  
11  
<
>
<
>
12 14  
12 14  
A2(–) M(–)  
A2(–) M(–)  
NSB0_01534a  
NSB0_01535a  
Position of the connection terminals  
3UG46 21  
3UG46 22  
A
1
I
N
M
A
2
1
2
1
4
1
1
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/75  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Power factor monitoring  
Overview  
The 3UG30 14 power factor monitoring device enables the load  
monitoring of motors.  
Function  
The 3UG30 14 monitoring relay is used for monitoring the load of  
motors by measuring the phase angle between voltage and  
current, i.e. the power factor. The output relays respond as long  
as the power factor lies between the upper and lower thresholds.  
These are set separately on the front using two potentiometers.  
Note:  
Power factor monitoring relays are connected in series after the  
motor contactor to ensure that the delay time for bridging start-  
up elapses after switch-on. For this reason, the output relay must  
not be connected in series with the supply voltage of the motor  
contactor, otherwise it would not be possible to switch on the  
load feeder. The minimum current must be at least 0.2 A.  
When the value of the power factor lies outside this range, the  
corresponding output relay will drop after a delay time T1, that  
can be set on the front, has elapsed. A fixed hysteresis prevents  
the output relay from continuously switching on and off when the  
measured value is close to the threshold.  
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
1
2
9
1
2
The ON-delay T2 can be used to suppress the effects of motor  
start-up.  
2
3
c
o
s
T
2
T
1
4
5
T
1
Important  
It is important to ensure that the phases are connected in the  
correct sequence L1-L2-L3, otherwise the power factor will be  
evaluated incorrectly.  
1
2
T
h
r
e
s
h
o
l
d
v
a
a
l
u
u
e
e
m
a
x
H
y
s
t
e
r
h
e
s
i
s
3
T
h
r
e
s
o
l
d
v
l
m
i
n
4
O
u
t
p
u
t
r
e
l
a
y
c
o
s
>
c
o
s
s
m
m
a
i
x
(
t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s
2
1
,
2
2
,
2
4
)
5
O
(
u
t
p
u
t
r
e
l
a
y
c
o
s
<
c
o
n
t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s
1
1
,
1
2
,
1
4
)
Technical specifications  
Type  
3UG30/3UG35  
Load capacity of the output relay  
Rated operational current I  
AC-15/230 V  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
max. 8  
3
e
DC-13/24 V  
1
DC-13/48 V  
0.45  
0.35  
0.2  
DC-13/60 V  
DC-13/110 V  
DC-13/230 V  
0.1  
Minimum contact load  
mA  
A
5/17 V for a fault of 1 ppm  
4
1)  
Output relay with DIAZED fuse  
gl/Gg operational class  
Operating cycles  
5
Electrical endurance  
Mechanical endurance  
Ambient temperature  
1 x 10  
6
Operating cycles  
2 x 10  
During operation  
During storage  
°C  
°C  
-20 ... + 50  
-30 ... + 70  
Connection of conductors  
Degree of protection  
Vibration resistance  
Solid  
mm²  
mm²  
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
Finely stranded, with end sleeves  
Terminals  
Enclosures  
IP20  
IP40  
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6  
Hz/mm 10 ... 150/0.035  
1) Short-circuits without any contact welding acc. to DIN VDE 0660,  
Part 200.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/76  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Power factor monitoring  
Rated control supply voltage U  
Voltage tolerance  
V
see Catalog LV 1 (L1/L2 also used to supply units)  
s
V
0.85 ... 1.15 x U  
s
Maximum power consumption  
VA  
Hz  
3
Frequency of the monitored line  
Setting range of power factor  
Hysteresis fixed  
50 ... 60  
0.1 ... 0.99 for lower and upper threshold  
10 for power factor 0.4  
10 ... 30 for power factor 0.4  
–10 referred to upper limit of effective range  
–0.8  
%
Setting accuracy  
%
%
%
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters  
Deviations for temperature fluctuations  
–0.05/K  
Delay time  
T2, ON-delay  
T1 after reaching the threshold  
s
s
0.5 ... 20; –20 %  
0.3 ... 3; –20 %  
Input circuit current range  
A
0.5 ... 10  
Input circuit peak current (< 1 s)  
Input circuit input resistor L1/L2/L3  
A
50  
2
kW  
W
Input circuit input resistor current IN1  
0.02  
Currents > 10 A only with current transformer.  
Dimensional drawings  
3UG30 14  
45  
77  
100  
Schematics  
3UG30 14  
Three-phase operation, I < 10 A~  
L1  
L2  
L3  
M
IN1  
L1 L2 L3  
< p. f.  
> p. f.  
11  
21  
> p. f. <  
NSB01130b  
12 14 22 24  
3UG30 14  
Three-phase operation, I > 10 A~  
L1  
L2  
L3  
M
K(P1) L(P2  
k(S1  
l(S2  
)
)
)
external current  
transformer  
11> p. f. 21  
L1 L2  
L3 IN1  
< p. f.  
> p. f. <  
NSB0_01131c  
12 14 22 24  
3UG30 14  
Single-phase operation, 230 V~  
L
N
Load  
L1 L2 L3 IN1  
< p. f.  
> p. f.  
11  
21  
> p. f. <  
NSB01132b  
12 14 22 24  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/77  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Insulation monitoring  
for ungrounded AC networks  
Overview  
Relay for monitoring the insulation resistance between the  
ungrounded single or three-phase AC supply and a protective  
ground conductor:  
• Measuring principle with superimposed DC voltage  
• Two selectable measuring ranges of 1 ... 110 kW  
• Stepless setting within the measuring range  
• Selectable:  
- Auto reset function with fixed hysteresis or  
- Storage of the tripping operation  
Test function with test button and terminal connections on the  
front  
• Switching output: 1 CO contact  
• Insulation fault indication with a red LED  
• Supply voltage indication with a green LED  
• Electro-magnetically compatible according to EN 50081 and  
EN 61000-6-2.  
Function  
The monitoring relay measures the insulation resistance  
between the ungrounded AC supply and an associated  
protective ground conductor.  
Note:  
The monitoring relay is designed for AC supply systems.  
Series-connected rectifiers must be galvanically isolated from  
the measuring relay that is to be monitored.  
A superposed DC measuring voltage is used to perform the  
measurement.  
The monitoring relay is divided into two ranges for an insulation  
resistance range from 1 to 100 kW. A range switch on the front  
can be used to switch over between a 1 to 11 kW range and a  
10 to 110 kW range. Within the selected range, the monitoring  
relay can be steplessly adapted to the respective insulation  
conditions.  
NSB0_01393  
1
A1/A2  
A1/B2  
Y1/Y2  
= Supply voltage  
A1-B2/A1-A2 for  
115 V/230 V AC  
A1-A2 for 24 ... 240 V AC/DC  
= Remote connection-  
save-reset  
= Key on the front -  
test/reset  
= Insulation resistance R  
of network  
Set operating value R  
= NO contact  
1
2
3
Y1/PE  
2
3
4
1.6 x R  
value  
4
5
R
R
If the insulation resistance undershoots the set threshold, the  
output relay is excited and the red LED (fault display) is lit.  
value  
11/14  
11/12  
5
If the insulation resistance exceeds 1.6 times (corresponding to  
60 % hysteresis) the set threshold, the output relay will return to  
the rest position.  
Test  
Test = > approx. 300 ms  
Test functions  
The "Test" button on the front can be used to simulate a ground  
fault. If the "Test" button is pressed for at least 300 ms, the output  
relay is energized and the fault LED lights up. An external test  
button can be connected to terminal Y1. The function is  
activated by closing (> 300 ms).  
Fault storage and RESET  
If terminals Y1 and Y2 are jumpered, the monitoring relay is set  
to fault storage mode. If the set insulation resistance is under-  
shot, the output relay is excited and remains tripped even after  
the insulation resistance rises above 1.6 times the set value  
again. Fault storage can be reset by briefly pressing the RESET  
button, briefly jumpering (< 300 ms) the Y1 and PE/ground  
terminals or by switching off and on the supply voltage.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/78  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Insulation monitoring  
for ungrounded AC networks  
Technical specifications  
Control circuits  
3UG3 081  
Operating range of the control supply voltage  
-15 % ... +10 %  
VA/W 8/2  
Rated power 24 ... 240 V AC/DC  
110 ... 130 V AC  
220 ... 240 V AC  
VA  
VA  
Hz  
3
3
Frequency of the rated control supply voltage  
Measurement circuits L/PE/ground  
50 ... 60  
• Operating value  
• Minimum internal resistance for AC  
k
k
1 ... 110  
100  
• Minimum internal resistance for DC  
• DC measurement voltage  
• Insulation voltage  
k
100  
V
V
30 DC  
415 AC  
Y1-Y2  
1
• Reset/test function terminals (max. 10 m)  
• Delay time in case of response  
Output relay  
s
1 CO contact,  
open-circuit principle  
General data  
Rated insulation voltage U  
between supply, measurement,  
and output circuit  
V
400 acc. to IEC 60947-1  
i
Overvoltage category  
Degree of pollution  
acc. to IEC 664  
III  
acc. to IEC 664  
3
Impulse withstand voltage U  
Degree of protection  
Shock resistance  
acc. to VDE 0435, Part 303  
acc. to EN 60529  
kV  
4
imp  
IP50 enclosure, IP20 terminals  
acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27  
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6  
g/ms 10  
Vibration resistance  
Hz/mm 10-55/0.35  
Permissible ambient temperature  
• During operation  
• During storage  
°C  
°C  
-25 ... 65  
-40 ... 85  
Permissible mounting position  
Conductor cross-section  
Any  
2
2
Solid  
mm  
mm  
2 x 0.75 ... 2.5  
2 x 0.75 ... 2.5  
Finely stranded with end sleeve  
Dimensional drawings  
45  
77  
100  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/79  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Insulation monitoring  
for ungrounded DC networks  
Overview  
Relay for monitoring the insulation resistance between  
ungrounded pure DC networks and a protective-ground  
conductor:  
• Front selector switch for open-circuit and closed-circuit  
principle for the output relay  
Test function with test buttons on the front for L+ and L-  
and over terminal connections  
• Measuring principle for differential current measurement  
• Response threshold can be set continuously from  
• Switching output: 1 CO contact  
• Insulation fault indicator for L+ and L- through two red LEDs  
• Supply voltage indication with a green LED  
• Electro-magnetically compatible according to EN 50081 and  
EN 61000-6-2  
10 to 110 kW  
• Selectable  
- Auto reset function with hysteresis or  
- Storage of the tripping operation  
Function  
The monitoring relay measures the insulation voltage between  
the positive and negative supply voltage in an ungrounded DC  
network and a corresponding protective conductor.  
Open/closed-circuit principle selector switch  
The function principle of the output relay can be adjusted by  
means of a selector switch on the front panel.  
The measurement is based on the DC residual current  
measurement principle. The response value can be adjusted  
steplessly in the range from 10 to 110 kW and thus can be  
adapted to the corresponding conditions. If the insulation  
resistance falls below the set response value, the output relay  
triggers (depending on the setting of the open/closed-circuit  
principle selector switch) and a fault LED lights up.  
If the relay is to respond in the event of a fault (contact symbol  
open), the open-circuit principle must be selected. If the relay  
however is to trigger in the event of a fault (contact symbol  
closed), the closed-circuit principle must be selected.  
Note:  
A ground fault is evaluated separately for L+ and L- and  
indicated by means of a corresponding LED.  
The position of the selector switch has no effect upon the fault  
LEDs. The LEDs always light up if the insulation resistance on L+  
or L– falls below the set value.  
Note:  
Due to the measurement principle, a symmetrical ground fault on  
terminals L+ and L- cannot be evaluated.  
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
3
9
5
1
2
=
=
S
B
u
u
p
t
p
o
l
n
y
v
o
l
t
a
g
e
1
2
3
4
5
A
1
/
A
2
t
o
n
f
r
n
o
n
t
-
R
T
e
s
e
t
L
+
a
d
L
-
/
Y
3
/
Y
4
e
s
t
L
+
Y
Y
1
2
/
/
Y
Y
3
3
3
=
B
u
t
t
o
n
o
n
f
r
o
n
t
-
T
e
s
t
L
-
Test function  
T
T
e
e
s
s
t
t
r
L
e
m
o
t
e
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
-
R
+ / P E  
R
H
y
s
t
L
6
-
L
-
/
P
E
R
v
a
l
u
e
A ground fault can be simulated using the Test L+ and Test L-  
buttons on the front. If the test button is pressed for at least 1 s,  
the status of the output relay changes and the corresponding  
fault LED lights up.  
O
c
p
e
n
-
4
5
6
=
=
=
T
T
I
e
e
s
s
t
t
r
r
e
e
m
m
o
o
t
t
e
e
c
c
o
o
n
n
n
e
e
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
-
-
i
r
c
u
i
t
/
T
S
e
s
t
L
+
c
l
i
o
r
s
e
d
t
-
7
8
c
p
c
u
i
n
t
r
i
n
c
i
p
l
e
t
o
r
e
,
r
e
l
s
e
t
1
1
/
1
4
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
r
e
s
i
s
a
n
c
e
R
1
1
/
1
2
>
e s t  
o
s
f
s
u
p
p
y
s
T
An external test button can be connected to terminals Y1-Y3 for  
L+ and terminals Y4-Y3 for L-. The function is triggered by  
means of a NO contact.  
e
t
r
e
s
p
o
n
s
e
v
a
l
u
e
R
=
e s t  
a
p
p
r
o
x
.
1
s
T
7
8
=
S
w
i
t
c
h
o
n
f
r
o
n
t
R
=
y s t  
t y p i c a l l y 2 x R  
x
H
O
p
e
n
-
c
i
r
c
u
i
t
/
c
l
o
s
e
d
-
c
i
r
c
u
i
t
p
r
i
n
c
i
p
l
e
=
N
O
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
Fault storage and RESET  
If terminals Y2 and Y3 are linked, the monitoring relay is set to  
fault storage mode.  
If the insulation resistance falls below the set value, the output  
relay triggers (depending on the setting of the open/closed  
circuit selector switch), and stays in this state even if the  
insulation resistance rises again above the hysteresis value  
(typical: 2 times the set value). This fault storage can be deleted  
by pressing and releasing the L+ RESET button, opening the  
Y2-Y3 connection or by switching off the supply voltage.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/80  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Insulation monitoring  
for ungrounded DC networks  
Technical specifications  
Control circuits  
3UG30 82  
Operating range of the control supply voltage  
-15 % ... +10 %  
VA/W 8/2  
Rated power  
24 ... 240 V AC  
Frequency of the rated control supply voltage  
Measuring circuits  
Hz  
50 ... 60  
• Operating value  
k
k
V
10 ... 110  
57  
• Minimum internal resistance for DC  
• Measurement DC voltage  
• Max. DC insulation voltage (L+/PE/ground, L-/PE/ground)  
• Reset/test function terminals (max. 10 m)  
• Delay time in case of response  
Output relay  
24 ... 240  
V DC 300  
Y1/Y3, Y4/Y3  
s
1
1 changeover contact, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle  
General data  
Rated insulation voltage U  
Insulation resistance  
Overvoltage category  
Degree of pollution  
between supply, measurement,  
and output circuit  
V
400  
i
acc. to IEC 664  
III  
3
acc. to IEC 664  
Impulse withstand voltage U  
Degree of protection  
Shock resistance  
acc. to VDE 0435, Part 303  
acc. to EN 60529  
V
4000  
imp  
IP50 enclosure, IP20 terminals  
acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27  
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6  
g/ms 10  
Vibration resistance  
Hz/mm 10-55/0.35  
Permissible ambient temperature  
• During operation  
• During storage  
°C  
°C  
-25 ... + 65  
-40 ... + 85  
Permissible mounting position  
Conductor cross-section  
any  
2
2
Solid  
mm  
mm  
2 x 0.75 ... 2.5  
2 x 0.75 ... 2.5  
Finely stranded with end sleeve  
Dimensional drawings  
45  
77  
100  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/81  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Level monitoring  
Overview  
The 3UG35 01 level monitoring relay is used together with the  
2- or 3-pole sensors to monitor the levels of conductive liquids.  
Function  
The principle of operation is based on measuring the electrical  
resistance of the liquid between two immersion sensors and a  
reference terminal. If the measured value is lower than the  
sensitivity set at the front, the output relay changes its switching  
state. In order to exclude electrolytic phenomena in the liquid,  
the sensors are supplied with alternating current.  
Note:  
It is also possible to connect other resistance sensors to the Min  
and Max terminals in the range 5 to 100 kW, e.g. photoresistors,  
temperature sensors, encoders based on resistance etc.  
The monitoring relay can therefore also be used for other  
applications apart from monitoring the levels of liquids.  
Two-level control: the output relay changes its switching state as  
soon as the liquid level reaches the maximum sensor, while the  
minimum sensor is submerged. The relay returns to its original  
switching state as soon as the minimum sensor no longer has  
contact with the liquid.  
A
1
/
A
2
N
S
B
0
_
0
0
9
6
1
T
3
3
1
2
For safe resetting, the supply voltage must be interrupted for  
at least 0.5 s (T3).  
The delay times T1 and T2 of the output relay have not been  
included in the diagram in order to enhance clarity.  
4
5
1
l e v e l )  
1
2
M
a
x
i
m
u
m
1
l e v e l )  
M
i
o
n
i
m
u
m
3
M
n
i
t
u
o
r
e
d
l
e
y
v
e
l
4
O
u
u
t
t
p
p
t
r
n
r
n
e
e
l
l
a
a
F
O
F
u
u
n
n
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
t
o
O
U
V
E
R
5
u
y
N
D
E
R
1
)
D
e
t
e
r
m
i
n
e
d
b
y
t
h
e
a
r
r
a
n
g
e
m
e
n
t
o
f
t
h
e
p
r
o
b
e
s
i
n
t
h
e
m
o
n
i
t
o
r
e
d
l
i
q
u
i
d
.
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/82  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Level monitoring  
Technical specifications  
Type  
3UG30/3UG35  
Load capacity of the output relay  
Rated operational current I  
AC-15/230 V  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
max. 8  
3
e
DC-13/24 V  
1
DC-13/48 V  
0.45  
0.35  
0.2  
DC-13/60 V  
DC-13/110 V  
DC-13/230 V  
0.1  
Minimum contact load  
mA  
A
5/17 V for a fault of 1 ppm  
4
1)  
Output relay with DIAZED fuse  
gl/Gg operational class  
Operating cycles  
5
Electrical endurance  
Mechanical endurance  
Ambient temperature  
1 x 10  
6
Operating cycles  
2 x 10  
During operation  
During storage  
°C  
°C  
-20 ... + 50  
-30 ... + 70  
Connection of conductors  
Degree of protection  
Vibration resistance  
Solid  
mm²  
mm²  
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
Finely stranded, with end sleeves  
Terminals  
Enclosures  
IP20  
IP40  
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6  
Hz/mm 10 ... 150/0.035  
1) Short-circuits without any contact welding acc. to  
DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.  
Rated control supply voltage U  
Voltage tolerance  
Maximum power consumption  
Function  
V
see Catalog LV 1 (electrical isolation by means of a transformer)  
0.85 ... 1.1 x U  
s
s
W/VA 3/6  
Inlet or outlet monitoring  
Adjustable  
UNDER/OVER selector switch at the front  
Sensitivity  
kW  
%
5 ... 100  
–30  
Setting accuracy  
Repeat accuracy  
Sensor length  
at maximum sensitivity  
at constant parameters  
max.  
%
–0.1  
m
100  
Electrode voltage  
Electrode current  
Conductor capacity  
max.  
V
24 (50/60 Hz)  
1 (50/60 Hz)  
10  
max.  
mA  
nF  
1)  
of the sensor cable  
Delay time  
• T1 at Max/M terminal  
• T2 at Min/M terminal  
ms  
ms  
Typical 500 (ON-delay with OVER, OFF-delay with UNDER)  
Typical 300 (OFF-delay with OVER, ON-delay with UNDER)  
Mains buffering time  
ms  
300  
1) The sensor cable does not necessarily have to be shielded, but it is not  
recommended to lay this cable parallel to the power supply lines. It is also  
possible to use a shielded cable, whereby the shield has to be connected  
to the M terminal.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/83  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Level monitoring  
Dimensional drawings  
3UG35 01  
22,5  
77  
100  
Level monitoring sensors  
3UG32 07-3A  
three-pole wire electrode  
3UG32 07-1B  
single-pole bow electrode  
SW 22  
NSB00994  
15 15  
7±1  
SW 22  
6±1  
3UG32 07-1C  
single-pole electrode, rugged design  
SW 22  
3UG32 07-2A  
two-pole wire electrode  
PTFE-  
insulation  
SW 22  
NSB00995  
3UG32 07-2B  
two-pole bow electrode  
SW 22  
NSB00993a  
15 15  
7±1  
6±1  
Schematics  
3UG35 01  
AC  
A1  
M
Min Max  
11  
R
><  
12 14  
A2  
NSB00970  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/84  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Speed monitoring  
Overview  
The 3UG30 51 monitoring relay is used together with a sensor to  
monitor drives for underspeeding.  
Function  
The underspeed monitoring relay operates according to the  
principle of retriggerable OFF-delay. During the time (value) set  
on the front panel, another pulse must arrive at input IN1 or IN2  
to ensure that the output relay remains picked up. The  
monitoring relay evaluates the rising edge of the signal, i.e.  
a continuous signal is also recognized as a missing pulse. If the  
retrigger pulse does not arrive, indicating a reduction in speed,  
the output relay drops. In order to be able to start a drive, the  
output relay remains picked up during the ON-delay time T, even  
if the speed is still below the set value (motor starting override  
time). The first pulse must come within this time.  
Speed monitoring with memory (MEMORY)  
When the output relay drops, this state remains stored even  
when the speed reaches a permissible value again. The stored  
state can be ended by a control signal at the reset terminal or by  
interrupting the supply voltage for at least 200 ms.  
A
1
/
A
2
N
S
B
0
_
0
0
9
6
6
1
2
S
H
A
O
R
S
e
c
t
v
a
l
u
e
5
2
1
y
s
t
e
r
e
s
i
s
3
3
t
u
a
l
v
a
l
u
e
4
u
t
p
u
t
r
e
l
a
y
E
5
e
s
e
t
T
T
The monitoring relay can be used for all functions where a  
continuous pulse signal needs to be monitored (belt travel  
monitoring, completeness monitoring, passing monitoring,  
clock-time monitoring).  
6
t
o
r
a
g
e
(
M
M
O
R
Y
)
4
6
6
Speed monitoring without memory (NO MEMORY)  
When the speed of the drive drops below the set value, the  
output relay drops. It picks up again when the speed is greater  
than the set value plus the fixed hysteresis.  
A
1
/
A
2
N
S
B
0
_
0
0
9
6
5
3
1
S
H
A
O
e
c
t
v
a
l
u
e
2
1
2
y
s
t
e
r
e
s
i
s
3
t
u
a
l
v
a
l
u
e
4
u
t
p
u
t
r
e
l
a
y
T
4
Technical specifications  
Type  
3UG30/3UG35  
Load capacity of the output relay  
Rated operational current I  
AC-15/230 V  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
max. 8  
3
e
DC-13/24 V  
1
DC-13/48 V  
0.45  
0.35  
0.2  
DC-13/60 V  
DC-13/110 V  
DC-13/230 V  
0.1  
Minimum contact load  
mA  
A
5/17 V for a fault of 1 ppm  
4
1)  
Output relay with DIAZED fuse  
gl/Gg operational class  
Operating cycles  
5
Electrical endurance  
Mechanical endurance  
Ambient temperature  
1 x 10  
6
Operating cycles  
2 x 10  
During operation  
During storage  
°C  
°C  
-20 ... + 50  
-30 ... + 70  
Connection of conductors  
Degree of protection  
Vibration resistance  
Solid  
mm²  
mm²  
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
Finely stranded, with end sleeves  
Terminals  
Enclosures  
IP20  
IP40  
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6  
Hz/mm 10 ... 150/0.035  
1) Short-circuits without any contact welding acc. to  
DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/85  
Monitoring Relays  
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements  
Speed monitoring  
Type  
3UG30 51  
Rated control supply voltage U  
V
See Catalog LV 1 (for AC voltages with electrical isolation by means of  
transformer, 24 V DC without electrical isolation)  
s
Voltage tolerance  
Maximum power consumption  
Set value  
0.85 ... 1.15 x U  
s
W/VA 4/5  
%
%
%
%
Adjustable to 10 ... 100 of the selected time setting range  
Typical 5 of the set value  
Hysteresis  
Setting accuracy  
Repeat accuracy  
Deviations  
10 referred to upper limit of time setting range  
–0.5  
at constant parameters  
with temperature fluctuations  
%/°C 0.1  
ON-delay T  
s
Adjustable to 0.3 ... 30 –10 %  
1)  
Signal input IN1  
(Input resistance 16 k)  
(Input resistance 1 k)  
V
Max. voltage 30, 3-wire sensor, pnp operation  
Floating contact, 2-wire NAMUR sensor  
1)  
Signal input IN2  
Voltage level for reliable operation Level 1  
V
V
4.5 ... 30  
0 up to 1  
Level 0  
Sensor supply  
+24 V/0 V  
+8 V2  
mA  
mA  
max. 50 at 24 V (20 ... 35 V) DC  
1 DC 8.2 V  
Measuring range,  
selectable (rotary switch on front)  
Time setting range  
• 0.1 ... 1 s  
• 1 ... 10 s  
- Frequency  
Hz  
10 ... 1  
-1  
-1  
-1  
-1  
- Revolutions  
min  
600 ... 60  
- Frequency  
- Revolutions  
Hz  
min  
1 ... 0.1  
60 ... 6  
• 0.1 ... 1 min  
• 1 ... 10 min  
- Frequency  
- Revolutions  
Hz  
min  
0.17 ... 0.017  
10 ... 1  
- Frequency  
- Revolutions  
Hz  
min  
0.017 ... 0.0017  
1 ... 0.1  
- Minimum pulse duration of signal ms  
- Minimum interval between 2 pulses  
5
5
Function mode setting  
with or without memory  
Rotary switch on front panel  
Availability time after application of U  
Mains buffering time  
ms  
ms  
200  
10  
s
1) The sensors are not included in the scope of supply.  
Dimensional drawings  
45  
77  
100  
Schematics  
-
+
U
AC/  
DC  
PNP  
A1 +24 V  
+
RES IN1 0V  
11  
n < Value  
IN2  
_
12 14  
A2  
+ 8V2  
NSB00976c  
+ NAMUR  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/86  
Monitoring Relays  
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays  
General data  
Overview  
The 3RS10 and 3RS11 temperature monitoring relays can be  
used for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media.  
The temperature is sensed by the sensor in the medium,  
evaluated by the device and monitored for overshoot or  
undershoot or for staying within an operating range (window  
function).  
Temperature  
setting  
LED for display  
LED "Device on voltage"  
LED "Relay switched"  
Hysteresis switch  
"Up and Down" keys  
The range comprises adjustable analog units with one or two  
threshold values, digital units to DIN 3440, which are also a good  
alternative to temperature controls for the low-end range, and  
digital units for up to 3 sensors which have been optimized for  
monitoring large motors.  
Rotary switch for  
parameter selection  
NSB0_01421  
Design  
The temperature monitoring relays comply with:  
• IEC 60721-3-3 "Environmental conditions"  
• IEC 60947-5-1; VDE 0660 "Low-voltage controlgear,  
switchgear and systems – Electromechanical controlgear"  
• EN 61000-6-4 "Basic technical standard for emitted  
interference (Industry)"  
• EN 61000-6-2 "Basic technical standard for interference  
immunity (Industry)"  
• EN 50042 "Designations for terminals"  
• UL/CSA  
• DIN 3440 (3RS10 40, 3RS11 40, 3RS10 42, 3RS11 42).  
Temperature drift depending on the length and cross-section of  
the leads with PT100 sensors and an ambient temperature of  
20 °C, in K:  
Cable length Cross-section  
m
mm²  
0.5  
0.75  
0.0  
1
1.5  
0.0  
0.6  
1.5  
3.0  
4.5  
6.0  
12.1  
30.2  
0
0.0  
0.0  
0.9  
2.3  
4.5  
6.8  
9.0  
18.1  
45.5  
10  
1.8  
1.2  
25  
4.5  
3.0  
50  
9.0  
6.0  
75  
13.6  
18.1  
36.3  
91.6  
9.0  
100  
200  
500  
12.1  
24.2  
60.8  
Connection of resistance-type thermometers  
2-wire measurement  
When 2-wire temperature sensors are used, the resistances of  
the sensor and wiring are added. The resulting systematic error  
must be taken into account when the signal evaluator is  
calibrated. A jumper must be clamped between terminals T2  
and T3 for this purpose.  
3-wire measurement  
To minimize the effects of the line resistances, a three-wire circuit  
is often used. Using the additional wire, two measuring circuits  
can be formed of which one is used as a reference. The signal  
evaluator can then automatically calculate the line resistance  
and take it into account.  
I
T3  
T2  
I
PT 100  
T3  
T2  
T1  
PT 100  
NSB01323a  
T1  
I
NSB01324a  
Wiring errors  
The errors that are generated by the wiring comprise  
approximately 2.5 K/W. If the resistance of the wiring is not known  
and cannot be measured, the wiring errors can also be  
estimated using the following table.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/87  
Monitoring Relays  
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays  
General data  
Connection of thermocouples  
Function  
Based on the thermo-electrical effect, a differential temperature  
measurement will be performed between the measuring point  
and the signal evaluator.  
Once the temperature has reached the set threshold J1, the  
output relay K1 changes its output state as soon as the set time  
t has elapsed (K2 responds in the same manner to J2). The time  
delay can only be adjusted with digital units (on analog units,  
t = 0).  
This principle assumes that the signal evaluator knows the  
temperature at the clamping point (T2). For this reason, the  
3RS11 temperature monitoring relay has an integral compen-  
sator that determines this comparison temperature and builds it  
into the result of the measurement. Therefore, the thermal  
sensors and cables must be insulated.  
The relays return to their original state as soon as the  
temperature reaches the set hysteresis value.  
The absolute temperature is calculated from the ambient  
temperature of the signal evaluator and the temperature  
difference measured by the thermocouple.  
Temperature overshoot  
Closed-circuit principle  
Temperature detection is therefore possible (T1) without needing  
to know the precise ambient temperature of the clamping point  
at the signal evaluator (T2).  
NSB01327c  
1
J
2
J
The connecting cable is only permitted to be extended using  
connecting leads that are made from the same material as the  
thermocouple. If a different type of conductor is used, an error  
will result in the measurement.  
Us  
K1  
K2  
t
t
N
i
C
r
t
T
1
T
2
Temperature undershoot  
Closed-circuit principle  
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
3
2
5
a
N
i
M
e
a
s
u
r
i
n
g
p
o
i
n
t
I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l
NSB01329b  
1
J
r
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
p
o
i
n
t
c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n
2
J
Us  
K1  
K2  
You can find more information on the Internet at:  
t
http://www.feldgeraete.de/76/produkte/fuw.html  
http://www.ephy-mess.de  
t
t
or from  
EPHY-MESS GmbH (see Appendix, External Partners)  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/88  
Monitoring Relays  
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays  
General data  
Window monitoring (digital units only)  
Characteristic curves  
Once the temperature has reached the upper threshold J1, the  
output relay K1 changes its output state as soon as the set time t  
has elapsed. The relay returns to its original state as soon as the  
temperature reaches the set hysteresis value.  
For thermocouples  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
Type "E"  
Type "J"  
K2 responds in the same manner to the lower threshold of J2.  
Type "K"  
Type "N"  
Closed-circuit principle  
NSB01331c  
1
J
Type "T"  
20  
2
J
10  
0
Us  
K1  
K2  
0
200  
400  
600  
800  
1000 1200 1400 1600  
Temperature in °C  
t
t
t
For resistance sensors  
5000  
NTC  
Principle of operation with memory function (3RS10 42,  
3RS11 42), based on the example of temperature  
undershoot using the closed-circuit principle  
4000  
3000  
Once the temperature has reached the set threshold J1, the  
output relay K1 changes its output state as soon as the set time  
t has elapsed (K2 responds in the same manner to J2). The  
relays only return to the original state when the temperature falls  
below the set hysteresis value and when terminals Y3 and Y4  
have been briefly jumpered.  
KTY83  
KTY84  
PT1000  
2000  
1000  
0
PT100  
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
3
3
2
d
-100  
0
100  
200  
300  
400  
500  
1
2
J
Temperature in °C  
J
U
s
Y
3
-
Y
4
K
1
t
K
2
t
t
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/89  
Monitoring Relays  
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays  
Relays, analog adjustable  
Overview  
The 3RS10/3RS11 analog temperature monitoring relays can be  
used for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media.  
The temperature is sensed by the sensors in the medium,  
evaluated by the device and monitored for overshoot or  
undershoot. When the threshold values are reached, the output  
relay switches on or off depending on the setting.  
Technical specifications  
Type  
3RS10 00  
3RS10 10  
3RS11 00  
3RS11 01  
3RS10 20  
3RS10 30  
3RS11 20  
3RS11 21  
General data  
Sensor type  
Width  
PT100  
22.5  
TC type J  
TC type K  
PT100  
TC type J  
TC type K  
mm  
Operating range  
Rated power  
Auxiliary circuits  
Contacts  
0.85 ... 1.1 x U  
s
W/VA < 2/4  
1 NO + 1 NC  
1 CO + 1 NO  
Rated operational currents I  
• AC-15 at 230 V, 50 Hz  
• DC-13 at:  
e
A
3
- 24 V AC  
A
A
1
0.1  
- 240 V AC  
DIAZED fuse  
• gl/Gg operational class  
A
kA  
4
1
Short-circuit current (at 250 V)  
Electrical endurance  
100000  
AC-15 at 3 A  
6
Mechanical endurance  
Mechanical operating cycles  
3 x 10  
Tripping units  
Measuring accuracy  
at 20 °C ambient temperature  
(T20)  
Typical < 5 % from upper limit of scale  
Reference point accuracy  
--  
< –5 K  
--  
< –5 K  
Deviations due to ambient temperature  
in % from measuring range  
< 2  
< 3  
< 2  
< 3  
Hysteresis settings  
- For temperature 1  
- For temperature 2  
2 ... 20 % from upper limit of scale  
5 % from upper limit of scale  
Sensor circuits  
Typical sensor circuits  
- PT100  
mA  
mA  
Typical 1  
Typical 0.2  
--  
--  
Typical 1  
Typical 0.2  
--  
--  
- PT1000  
Open-circuit detection  
Short-circuit detection  
3-wire conductor connection  
Enclosures  
No  
No  
Yes  
1)  
--  
Yes  
--  
Environmental influences  
Permissible ambient temperature  
Permissible storage temperature  
Permissible mounting position  
°C  
°C  
-25 ... +60  
-40 ... +80  
any  
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529  
Terminals: IP20; Cover: IP40  
300  
Rated insulation voltage U  
V
i
(pollution degree 3)  
Conductor cross-section  
M 3.5 (standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2)  
Screw-type connection  
2
2
- Solid  
mm  
mm  
1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve  
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 14)  
- Tightening torque  
Nm  
0.8 ... 1.2  
Spring-loaded terminal  
- Solid  
2
2
2
mm  
mm  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve  
- Finely stranded, without end sleeve mm  
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 16)  
- Corresponding opening tool 8WA2 807  
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 68-2-6 Hz/mm 5 ... 26/0.75  
Shock resistance to IEC 68-2-27 g/ms 15/11  
1) 2-wire connection of resistance sensors with wire jumper between T2 and T3.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/90  
Monitoring Relays  
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays  
Relays, analog adjustable  
Dimensional drawings  
5
86  
A
B
C
36  
Type  
3RS10 00  
3RS10 10  
3RS11 0  
3RS11 1  
3RS1 .2  
3RS1 .3  
Standard terminal  
Screw-type  
terminal  
80  
90  
100  
Removable terminal  
Spring-loaded  
terminal  
84  
94  
92  
103  
102  
Screw-type  
terminal  
83  
NSB0_01606  
15  
15  
22,5  
22,5  
Schematics  
3RS11 20, 3RS11 21  
Connection examples  
3RS10 00, 3RS10 10  
A1  
11  
A1 A3  
11  
13  
K1  
K2  
14  
12  
23  
K1  
1
T1  
T2  
T3  
T-  
T+  
14  
12  
2
24  
A2  
NSB0_01336b  
A2  
NSB0_01333b  
General equipment designation  
A1 = 24 V AC/DC, 230 V AC, 24 ... 240 V AC/DC  
A3 = 110 V AC  
3RS11 00, 3RS11 01  
A1 A3  
11  
13  
A2 = M  
K1  
K1, K2, K3 output relay  
T-  
14  
12  
T+  
Equipment designation for 3RS10 00, 3RS10 10, 3RS11 00,  
3RS11 01, 3RS10 20, 3RS10 30, 3RS11 20, 3RS11 21  
= LED: "Device connected to supply"  
J1 = LED: "Relay 1 tripped"  
A2  
NSB0_01334b  
J2 = LED: "Relay 2 tripped"  
T1 to T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor  
T+/T- = Sensor connection for thermocouples  
3RS10 20, 3RS10 30  
A1  
11  
K1  
T1  
Caution!  
14  
12  
1
T2  
When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used,  
T2 and T3 must be jumpered.  
23  
K2  
T3  
2
24  
A2  
NSB0_01335b  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/91  
Monitoring Relays  
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays  
Relays, digitally adjustable to DIN 3440  
Overview  
The 3RS10/3RS11 temperature monitoring relays can be used  
for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media. The  
temperature is sensed by the sensor in the medium, evaluated  
by the device and monitored for overshoot or undershoot or for  
staying within an operating range (window function).  
The 3RS10 40, 3RS20 40, 3RS11 40 and 3RS21 40 relays  
comply with the requirements of DIN 3440 as temperature  
monitors; the 3RS10 42 and 3RS11 42 relays comply with the  
requirements of DIN 3440 as temperature limiters. The relays are  
also an excellent alternative to temperature controls in the low-  
end performance range (2 or 3-point closed-loop control).  
Technical specifications  
Type  
3RS10 40/3RS10 42/3RS20 40 3RS11 40/3RS21 40  
3RS11 42  
General data  
Width  
mm  
V
45  
Operating range  
Rated power  
Auxiliary circuits  
Contacts  
0.85 ... 1.1 x U  
s
W/VA < 4/7  
1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO  
Rated operational currents I  
• AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz  
• DC-13 at:  
e
A
3
- 24 V AC  
A
A
1
0.1  
- 240 V AC  
DIAZED fuse  
gl/Gg operational class  
A
4
Electrical endurance  
AC-15 at 3 A  
A
100000  
6
Mechanical endurance  
Mechanical operating cycles  
30 x 10  
Tripping units  
Measuring accuracy at 20 °C ambient temperature  
< –2 K, –1 digit  
< –5 K, –1 digit  
< –5 K  
< –7 K, –1 digit  
(T20)  
Reference point accuracy  
--  
Deviations due to ambient temperature  
in % from measuring range  
%
0.05 °C per K deviation from T20  
Measuring cycle  
ms  
500  
Hysteresis settings  
- for temperature 1  
1 ... 99 Kelvin, for both values  
Adjustable delay time  
Sensor circuits  
s
0 ... 999  
Typical sensor circuits  
- PT100  
mA  
mA  
Typical 1  
-
-
-
-
- PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC  
Typical 0.2  
1)  
Open-circuit detection  
Short-circuit detection  
3-wire conductor connection  
Enclosures  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
-
Yes  
No  
-
Yes  
2)  
Yes  
Environmental influences  
Permissible ambient temperature  
Permissible storage temperature  
Permissible mounting position  
°C  
°C  
-25 ... +60  
-40 ... +80  
any  
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529  
Terminals: IP20; Cover: IP40  
Rated insulation voltage U  
(pollution degree 3)  
V AC 300  
i
Conductor cross-section  
M 3.5 (standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2)  
Screw-type connection  
- Solid  
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve  
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
- Tightening torque  
2
2
mm  
mm  
1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
AWG 2 x (20 ... 14)  
Nm  
0.8 ... 1.2  
Spring-loaded terminal  
- Solid  
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve  
- Finely stranded, without end sleeve  
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
- Corresponding opening tool  
2
2
2
mm  
mm  
mm  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
AWG 2 x (24 ... 16)  
3)  
8WA2 807  
Vibration resistance IEC 68-2-6  
Shock resistance IEC 68-2-27  
Hz/mm 5 ... 26/0.75  
g/ms 15/11  
1) Not for NTC B57227-K333-A1 (100 °C: 1.8 k; 25 °C: 32.762 k).  
2) 2-wire connection of resistance sensors with wire jumper between T2 and T3.  
3) See Catalog LV1, Accessories, 3RP15 Solid-State Timing Relays.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/92  
Monitoring Relays  
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays  
Relays, digitally adjustable to DIN 3440  
Dimensional drawings  
8
6
A
C
4
5
6
5
4
7
5
3
6
3RS10, 3RS11, 3RS20, 3RS21 digital  
Removable terminal  
Spring-loaded terminal 84  
Screw-type terminal 83  
108  
106  
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
4
1
2
a
Schematics  
Connection examples  
General equipment designation  
3RS10 40, 3RS10 42, 3RS20 40  
A1, A2, A3 terminals for rated control supply voltage  
K1, K2, K3 output relay  
Y
1
/
Y
2
/
A
1
Y
3
Y
4
1
2
3
5
5
3
M
e
m
o
r
y
/
K
1
R
e
s
e
t
1
8
1
Item code  
T
T
1
2
1
6
K
2
J1 = LED: "Relay 1 tripped"  
J2 = LED: "Relay 2 tripped"  
Ready = LED: "Device is ready for operation"  
T
3
2
2
8
6
2
K
3
R
e
a
d
y
3
4
A
2
T1 to T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor  
T+/T- = Sensor connection for thermocouples  
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
3
3
7
d
3RS11 40, 3RS11 42, 3RS21 40  
Y1/Y2 connection for memory jumper for 3RS10 40, 3RS11 40,  
3RS20 40, 3RS21 40 or Y3/Y4 Reset input for 3RS10 42,  
3RS11 42  
Y
1
/
A
1
Y
2
/
Y
3
Y
4
1
2
3
5
5
3
K
K
K
1
2
3
M
e
m
o
r
y
/
R
e
s
e
t
1
8
1
1
6
Caution!  
T
-
2
2
8
6
When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used,  
T2 and T3 must be jumpered.  
2
T
+
3
4
R
e
a
d
y
A
2
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
3
3
9
c
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/93  
Monitoring Relays  
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays  
Relays, digitally adjustable for up to 3 sensors  
Overview  
The 3RS10 41 temperature monitoring relays can be used for  
measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media. The  
temperature is sensed by the sensor in the medium, evaluated  
by the device and monitored for overshoot or undershoot or for  
staying within an operating range (window function). The signal  
evaluator can evaluate up to 3 resistance sensors at the same  
time and is specially designed for monitoring motor windings  
and bearings.  
Technical specifications  
Type  
3RS10 41  
General data  
Width  
mm  
V
45  
Operating range  
Rated power  
Auxiliary circuits  
Contacts  
0.85 ... 1.1 x U  
s
W/VA < 4/7  
1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO  
Rated operational currents I  
• AC-15 at 230 V AC, 50 Hz  
• DC-13 at:  
e
A
3
- 24 V AC  
A
A
1
0.1  
- 240 V AC  
DIAZED fuse  
• gl/Gg operational class  
A
A
4
Electrical endurance AC-15 at 3 A  
100000  
6
Mechanical endurance  
Mechanical operating cycles  
30 x 10  
Tripping units  
Measuring accuracy at 20 °C ambient temperature  
(T20)  
< –2 K, –1 digit  
Deviations due to ambient temperature  
in % from measuring range  
%
0.05 per K deviation from T20  
Measuring cycle  
ms  
500  
Hysteresis settings for temperature 1  
Adjustable delay time  
Sensor circuits  
1 ... 99 K, for both values  
0 ... 999  
s
Typical sensor circuits  
- PT100  
mA  
mA  
Typical 1  
- PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC  
Typical 0.2  
1)  
Open-circuit detection  
Short-circuit detection  
3-wire conductor connection  
Enclosures  
Yes  
Yes  
2)  
Yes  
Environmental influences  
Permissible ambient temperature  
Permissible storage temperature  
Permissible mounting position  
°C  
°C  
-25 ... +60  
-40 ... +80  
any  
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529  
Terminals: IP20; Cover: IP40  
Rated insulation voltage U  
(pollution degree 3)  
V AC 300  
i
Conductor cross-section  
M 3.5 (standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2)  
Screw-type connection  
- Solid  
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve  
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
- Tightening torque  
2
2
mm  
mm  
1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
AWG 2 x (20 ... 14)  
Nm  
0.8 ... 1.2  
Spring-loaded terminal  
- Solid  
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve  
- Finely stranded, without end sleeve  
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
- Corresponding opening tool  
2
2
2
mm  
mm  
mm  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
AWG 2 x (24 ... 16)  
3)  
8WA2 807  
Vibration resistance IEC 68-2-6  
Shock resistance IEC 68-2-27  
5 ... 26 Hz/0.75 mm  
15 g/11 ms  
1) Not for NTC B57227-K333-A1 (100 °C: 1.8 k; 25 °C: 32.762 k).  
2) 2-wire connection of resistance sensors with wire jumper between T2 and T3.  
3) See Catalog LV1, Accessories, 3RP15 Solid-State Timing Relays.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/94  
Monitoring Relays  
3RS10, 3RS11 Temperature Monitoring Relays  
Relays, digitally adjustable for up to 3 sensors  
Dimensional drawings  
8
6
A
C
4
5
6
5
4
7
5
3
6
3RS10, 3RS11, 3RS20, 3RS21 digital  
Removable terminal  
Spring-loaded terminal 84  
Screw-type terminal 83  
108  
106  
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
4
1
2
a
Schematics  
Connection example  
Equipment designation for 3RS10 41  
J1 = LED: "Relay 1 tripped"  
Y1 Y2  
A1  
15  
J2 = LED: "Relay 2 tripped"  
K1  
Memory  
18  
16  
1T1  
1T2  
1T3  
Ready = LED: "Device is ready for operation"  
1
25  
K2  
K3  
2T1  
2T2  
2T3  
28  
26  
33  
1T1 to 1T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor 1  
2T1 to 2T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor 2  
3T1 to 3T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor 3  
Y1/Y2 connection for memory jumper  
2
3T1  
3T2  
3T3  
Ready  
34  
A2  
NSB0_01338c  
General equipment designation  
Caution!  
A1, A2, A3 terminals for rated control supply voltage  
K1, K2, K3 output relay  
When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used,  
T2 and T3 must be jumpered.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/95  
Monitoring Relays  
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection  
For PTC sensors  
Overview  
Thermistor motor protection devices are used for direct  
monitoring of the motor winding temperature. For this purpose,  
the motors are equipped with temperature-dependent resistors  
(PTC) that are directly installed in the motor winding and abruptly  
change their resistance at their limit temperature.  
Design  
The 3RN1 tripping units are suitable for use in any climate and  
finger-safe according to EN 0106 Part 50274. They comply with:  
• EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4, "Electromagnetic  
compatibility of I&C equipment in industrial process  
engineering"  
Use in areas subject to explosion hazard for gases  
All devices are approved for Equipment Group II, Category (2)  
in Area "G" (areas that contain explosive gases, vapor, spray and  
air mixtures).  
With PTB 01 ATEX 3218 ex II (2) G, compliance with  
guideline 94/9 EG Appendix II is confirmed. The safety devices  
must be selected with suitable settings for the safe operation of  
motors of the "Increased safety" (EEx e) and "Flameproof  
enclosure" (EEx d) degrees of protection and are accessed  
outside the area subject to explosion hazard.  
• EN 60947-8  
The terminals of the auxiliary contacts are designated in  
accordance with EN 50005.  
The 3RN1 tripping units are suitable for snap-on mounting onto  
35 mm standard mounting rails according to EN 50022 or for  
screw-mounting using an adapter (Accessories).  
PTB 01 ATEX 3218 ex II (2) G  
The increased danger in areas subject to explosion hazard  
demands careful analysis of the operator's guide, the safety and  
commissioning instructions and the standard (EN 60079-14/  
VDE 0165) for electronic equipment in areas subject to gas  
explosion hazards.  
Any mounting position is possible.  
For devices with the "Manual RESET" function, the test function  
can be activated and a trip simulated by pressing the blue  
Test/RESET button for longer than 2 seconds.  
If a Type A temperature sensor is connected to a Type A tripping  
unit, compliance with the operating temperatures is assured (on  
pick-up and reset) according to IEC 60034-11-2 (EN 60947-8).  
A risk analysis must be performed for the complete plant or  
machine. If this risk analysis results in a minimal potential for  
danger (Safety Category 1), all 3RN1 TMS tripping units can be  
implemented taking into account the safety notes. In the case of  
plants or machines with a high potential risk, variants with  
integrated short-circuit detection in the sensor circuit are  
necessary.  
4000  
R
1330  
Use in areas subject to explosion hazard for dust  
550  
250  
PTB 01 ATEX 3218 ex II (2) G  
3RN10 11-.B/-.G, 3RN10 12-.B/-.G and 3RN10 13-...0 tripping  
units can be used as safety devices for motors in areas subject  
to gas explosion hazard for protection against impermissible  
overheating due to overload. If the ATEX marking has the  
extension "D:=Dust", these units can also be used as protective  
devices for motors in areas subject to dust explosion hazard  
(EN 50281-1-1).  
20  
NSB00320  
-20°C  
0
TNF-20 TNF TNF+15 T  
TNF-5 TNF+5  
Additional information is provided in the EU type test certificate  
which can be obtained from the Internet. The units comply with  
the requirements of the following classes:  
The characteristic curves of the Type A temperature sensors are  
described in EN 60947-8, DIN 44081 and DIN 44082.  
Device  
Class  
3RN10 00, 3RN10 10, 3RN10 11-.C, EN 954-1: Category 1  
3RN10 12-.C, 3RN10 22, 3RN10 62  
3RN10 11-.B, 3RN10 11-.G,  
3RN10 12-.B, 3RN10 12-.G,  
3RN10 13  
EN 954-1: Category 2  
The measuring circuit leads must be routed as separate control  
leads. It is not permitted to use cores from the supply line of the  
motor or any other main supply cables. If extreme inductive or  
capacitive interference is expected as a result of power lines  
routed in parallel, shielded control leads must be used.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/96  
Monitoring Relays  
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection  
For PTC sensors  
Cable routing  
Function  
Maximum cable length for sensor circuit cables  
The 3RN1 tripping units operate in accordance with the closed-  
circuit principle and therefore monitor themselves for open-  
circuit (except: warning output in the case of 3RN10 22).  
A momentary power failure of less than 50 ms does not change  
the status of the auxiliary contacts. The 3RN10 11, 3RN10 12  
and 3RN10 13 units with 2 changeover contacts are also  
equipped with short-circuit detection in the sensor circuit. The  
unit will trip in the event of a short-circuit in the sensor circuit  
(resistance in sensor circuit < 20 W).  
Conductor cross-  
Cable length in m for tripping units  
2
section in mm  
Without short-circuit  
detection  
3RN10 00, 3RN10 10  
3RN10 11-.C  
3RN10 12-.C  
3RN10 22, 3RN10 62  
With short-circuit  
1)  
detection  
3RN10 11-.B/-.G  
3RN10 12-.B/-.G  
3RN10 13  
2.5  
1.5  
0.5  
2 x 2800  
2 x 1500  
2 x 500  
2 x 250  
2 x 150  
2 x 50  
All tripping units (except for 24 V AC/DC ) feature electrical  
isolation between the control circuit and the sensor circuit.  
1) A short-circuit in the sensor circuit will be detected up to this maximum  
cable length.  
3RN10 00 compact tripping units  
The compact tripping unit is equipped with a red LED (TRIPPED)  
for the tripped display and a changeover contact.  
Notes:  
After the unit has tripped, it is automatically reset once the  
thermistors have cooled down. The root of the changeover  
contact is connected to the control voltage (95 is connected to  
terminal A1).  
Tripping of the thermistor protection relay even in combination  
with a converter must directly result in disconnection. This must  
be implemented with circuitry.  
Mounting and installation must only be performed by qualified  
personnel who observe the applicable regulations! For  
mounting, use installation manual No.: 3ZX1012-0RN10-1AA1.  
This unit is particularly suitable in circuits in which the control  
circuit and signaling circuit have the same potential, e.g. in local  
control boxes.  
The 3RN10 is not intended for installation in hazardous areas.  
For installation in areas subject to explosion hazards, the 3RN10  
must be enclosed in a flameproof casing.  
3RN10 10, 3RN10 11, 3RN10 12, 3RN10 13 standard tripping  
units  
For tripping units with a 24 V AC/DC control voltage, electrical  
isolation must be secured with a battery network or a safety  
transformer according to DIN VDE 0551.  
The standard units are equipped with two LEDs (READY and  
TRIPPED) for an operating and tripped display and are available  
with either 1 NO + 1 NC or with 2 CO contacts. They are available  
depending on the version with automatic RESET (3RN10 10),  
manual/remote RESET (3RN10 11) or manual/automatic and  
remote RESET (3RN10 12 and 3RN10 13). Remote RESET can  
be achieved by connecting an external pushbutton with a  
normally-open function to terminals Y1 and Y2. If terminals Y1  
and Y2 are bridged, tripping will be followed by an automatic  
RESET.  
When tripping units with Auto-RESET function are used, a reset  
is performed automatically after the cooling time has expired. It  
must be ensured by means of an external interlock (latching with  
a separate On and Off button) that the machine to be monitored  
does not start up again spontaneously.  
Units with the Auto-RESET function must not be used in  
applications in which the unexpected restart can lead to  
personal injury or property damage.  
The 3RN10 11, 3RN10 12 and 3RN10 13 units with 2 COs also  
have short-circuit monitoring in the sensor circuit.  
In the case of tripping units without short-circuit detection,  
during commissioning or after modifications or maintenance  
work (assembly, disassembly) on the equipment, the sensor  
resistance must be measured using a suitable measuring  
instrument. For resistances < 50 Ohm, the sensor circuit must  
be checked for a short-circuit.  
The 3RN10 12 and the 3RN10 13 are non-volatile. This means  
that even if the control voltage fails, a preceding trip will be  
latched.  
In the case of the 3RN10 13 tripping unit, tripping due to a short-  
circuit in the sensor circuit will be indicated by a flashing red  
LED. The monostable version also indicates open-circuit in the  
sensor circuit by flashing of the red LED.  
If 3RN10 00 units are used to protect EEx e motors, separate  
monitoring of the control voltage is recommended because there  
is no Ready LED to indicate connection to the supply voltage.  
If 3RN10 13-.BW01 units are used to protect EEx e motors,  
separate monitoring of the control voltage is recommended  
because the switching status of the auxiliary contacts does not  
change if the control voltage fails (use of a bistable relay is  
recommended).  
3RN10 22 "Warning and disconnection" tripping units  
Two sensor circuits can be connected to one 3RN10 22 tripping  
unit that acts on one output relay with 1 NO contact for warning  
and 1 CO for disconnection. Temperature sensors with different  
rated response temperatures TNF are used to implement the  
"Warning" and "Disconnection" functions. When the "Warning"  
sensor circuit responds, a yellow LED is lit and when the  
"Disconnection" circuit responds, a red LED is lit.  
Before commissioning, the effectiveness of the protection  
function must be checked.  
The sensor circuits have a different reset response and  
operating behavior:  
• "Warning" (terminals 2T1, T2) only features automatic RESET  
and uses the open-circuit principle.  
• "Disconnection" (terminals 1T1, T2) can be changed from  
manual RESET to automatic RESET by linking terminals Y1  
and Y2. Remote RESET is implemented by connecting an  
external pushbutton with a normally-open function.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/97  
Monitoring Relays  
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection  
For PTC sensors  
1)  
3RN10 11  
3RN10 62 tripping units for multiple motor protection  
N
S
B
0
_
0
0
3
1
5
c
Up to 6 sensor circuits can be connected to the 3RN10 62  
tripping unit, all of which act on one output relay. The  
simultaneous protection of several motors (up to 6) is an  
advantage for multi-motor drives (e.g. if one motor is  
overloaded, all the other motors of the drive will be shut down).  
Apart from the red LED TRIPPED, which signals the switching  
status of the tripping unit, an LED is assigned to each sensor  
circuit which indicates the sensor circuit that has responded.  
Unused sensor circuits must be short-circuited.  
A
1
/
A
2
3
8
0
0
1
5
0
0
T
1
/
T
2
(
Y
1
/
Y
2
)
K
L
E
D
T
r
i
p
p
e
d
The reset response of the 3RN10 62 tripping units can be  
changed from manual RESET to automatic RESET by linking  
terminals Y1 and Y2. Remote RESET is implemented by  
connecting an external pushbutton with a normally-open  
function.  
3RN10 13-...01  
NSB0_00316a  
A1/A2  
3800  
1500  
T1/T2  
RESET  
(Y1/Y2)  
Response of the tripping units in the event of control voltage  
failure  
Behavior  
for  
Monostable  
Non-volatile  
Monostable  
Bistable  
K
3RN10 00  
3RN10 10  
3RN10 11  
3RN10 12  
3RN10 13-...0  
3RN10 22  
3RN10 62  
3RN10 13-...01  
LED Tripped  
1)  
3RN10 12 /3RN10 22/3RN10 62  
Failure of the  
control voltage  
Device trips  
Device trips  
No change in  
state of the  
auxiliary contacts  
NSB0_00317a  
A1/A2  
3800  
Return of the  
control voltage  
without a  
preceding  
tripping operation  
Device resets  
Device resets  
No change in  
state of the  
auxiliary contacts  
1500  
T1/T2  
RESET  
(Y1/Y2)  
Return of the  
Device resets  
The device  
remains tripped  
No change in  
state of the  
auxiliary contacts  
K, K2  
control voltage  
after a preceding  
tripping operation  
LED Tripped  
3RN10 13-...0  
Safe electrical isolation  
NSB0_00318a  
All circuits (outputs, control circuits, sensor and RESET circuits)  
of the multifunction tripping units 3RN10 13-1BW10 and  
3RN10 13-1GW10 (wide voltage range, monostable output relay  
and screw-type terminals) are safely isolated from each other  
up to a rated voltage of 300 V according to DIN VDE 0100  
Part 410/EN 60947-1.  
A1/A2  
3800  
1500  
T1/T2  
RESET  
(Y1/Y2)  
K
LED Tripped  
Function diagrams  
3RN10 00/3RN10 10  
(Auto-RESET)  
3RN10 22 only  
NSB0_00319b  
NSB0_00314b  
3800  
1500  
A1/A2  
2T1/T2  
3800  
1500  
T1/T2  
K1  
LED Alarm  
K
LED Tripped  
1) For versions with 2 CO (3RN10 1.G...): See 3RN10 13. function diagram  
for short-circuit response of sensor circuit.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/98  
Monitoring Relays  
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection  
For PTC sensors  
Technical specifications  
Type  
Compact  
units  
Standard units  
3RN10 10  
Multifunction Warning +  
Multiple  
motor  
units  
tripping  
protection  
3RN10 00  
3RN10 11  
3RN10 12  
3RN10 13  
3RN10 22  
3RN10 62  
General data  
Width  
mm  
22.5  
1
45  
6
Number of connectable sensor  
circuits  
2
1)  
Response in the event of control  
voltage failure  
Manual RESET  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
Automatic RESET  
Remote RESET  
TEST pushbutton  
Yes  
Yes  
2)  
Yes  
Yes  
Short-circuit detection for sensor  
circuit  
Yes (for 2 CO units)  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
3)  
Short-circuit and open-circuit  
indication  
No  
No  
Yes  
Warning and switching off in one unit  
Tripping units  
No  
Rated insulation voltage U  
(pollution degree 3)  
V
300  
i
Permissible ambient temperature  
Permissible storage temperature  
EMC tests  
°C  
°C  
-25 … +60  
-40 … +80  
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4  
IP20  
Degree of protection acc. to EN  
60529/VDE 0470-1  
Conductor cross-section  
Screw-type connection  
• Solid  
M3  
2
2
mm  
mm  
1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)  
• Finely stranded, with end sleeve  
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 14)  
• Tightening torque  
Spring-loaded terminals  
• Solid  
Nm  
0.8 ... 1.2  
2
2
2
mm  
mm  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
• Finely stranded, with end sleeve  
• Finely stranded, without end sleeve mm  
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 16)  
Sensor circuits  
Measuring circuit load  
ˆ 5  
at R ˆ 1.5 mW  
F
Voltage in sensor circuit  
V
ˆ 2  
at R ˆ 1.5 mW  
F
Response temperature  
°C  
s
60 ... 180  
Approx. 5  
ˆ 1.5  
(depends on sensor)  
Coupling time  
(depends on sensor)  
Summation PTC resistance R  
(per sensor loop)  
Operating value  
Return value  
kW  
F
kW  
kW  
3.4 ... 3.8  
1.5 ... 1.65  
Response tolerance  
°C  
–6  
1) See Catalog LV 1, Selection and Ordering Data.  
2) Remote RESET possible by disconnecting control voltage.  
3) Open-circuits are only indicated by monostable versions  
(3RN10 13-....0).  
4) See Catalog LV1, Accessories, 3RP15 Solid-State Timing Relays.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/99  
Monitoring Relays  
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection  
For PTC sensors  
Type  
Compact  
units  
Standard units  
3RN10 10  
Multifunction Warning +  
Multiple  
motor  
units  
tripping  
protection  
3RN10 00  
3RN10 11  
3RN10 12  
3RN10 13  
3RN10 22  
3RN10 62  
Control circuits  
Rated control supply voltage U  
1)  
s
Operating range  
110 V/230 V AC  
• 24 V ... 240 V AC/DC  
• 24 V AC/DC  
0.85 ... 1.1 x U  
0.85 ... 1.1 x U  
s
s
s
0.85 ... 1.2 x U for DC operation, 0.85 ... 1.1 x U for AC operation  
s
Rated power  
• AC  
• AC/DC  
• DC  
W
W
W
< 2  
< 2  
< 2  
Max. mains buffering time  
Auxiliary circuits  
ms  
50  
Continuous thermal current I  
A
5
3
the  
Rated operational current I  
• AC-15 240 V  
e
A
A
2)  
• DC-13 24 V  
1 for units with 1 CO or 2 COs  
2 for units with 1 NC + 1 NO  
1
1
2
3)  
DIAZED fuse  
A
6
CSA and UL rated data, control circuit  
Rated control voltage 50/60 Hz  
• AC  
• DC  
V
V
300  
300  
Switching capacity  
R 300/B 300  
--  
Safe isolation up to 300 V  
acc. to DIN 60 947-1  
3RN10 13-  
1BW10  
--  
1) See Catalog LV 1, Selection and Ordering Data.  
2) 2 A for 3RN10 13-.BW01 (bistable output relays).  
3) > 1 kA weld-free acc. to EN 60947-5-1.  
I
n
Dimensional drawings  
3RN1. with 1 ... 2 sensor circuits  
3RN10 62  
5
86  
8
6
4
5
36  
6
5
4
7
5
3
6
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
4
1
2
a
NSB0_01606  
15  
15  
22,5  
22,5  
A
B
C
A
C
3RN10 00  
3RN10 00  
3RN10 11  
3RN10 12  
3RN10 13  
3RN10 22  
3RN10 62  
Standard terminal  
Spring-loaded terminal 84.3  
107.6  
104  
Screw-type terminal  
81  
Removable terminal  
Removable terminal  
Spring-loaded  
terminal  
84  
94  
92  
103  
102  
Spring-loaded terminal 84  
Screw-type terminal 83  
108  
106  
Screw-type  
terminal  
83  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/100  
Monitoring Relays  
3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection  
For PTC sensors  
Schematics  
Connection diagrams  
Illustrated with control  
voltage applied  
Illustrated with control Illustrated with control  
Illustrated with control  
voltage not applied  
General equipment designation  
voltage not applied  
voltage applied  
3RN10 00, 1 CO  
A1, A2, A3 Connections of the  
control voltage  
A1/95  
A1(11)  
N
Amplifier  
T/R  
TEST/RESET button  
Connections for remote  
RESET (jumpered =  
Auto-RESET)  
The double arrow  
indicates an operating  
status which deviates  
from the standard  
representation of the  
contact acc. to  
H2  
K
Y1, Y2  
N
(14) (12)  
NSB0_00322b  
T1 T2  
A2  
96 98  
Â
3RN10 10, 1 NO + 1 NC  
3RN10 10, 2 COs  
A1  
H1  
95  
05  
(11)  
(21)  
A1  
H1  
95 97  
96 98  
(13) (21)  
H2  
DIN 40900, Part 7  
(in this case: Position of  
the contacts when  
control voltage is applied  
to terminals A1 and A2)  
H2  
N
K
K
N
K
(14) (12) (24) (22)  
T1 T2  
A2  
96 98 06 08  
(14) (22)  
NSB0_00323b  
T1 T2  
A2  
NSB0_01397  
T/R  
1)  
3RN10 11 , 1 NO + 1 NC  
A1  
3RN10 11, 2 COs  
95 97  
(13) (21)  
A1  
H1  
95  
05  
(11)  
(21)  
Equipment designation for 3RN10  
H1  
H1  
"READY" LED  
"TRIPPED" LED  
Output relay  
Connections of the  
sensor loop  
H2  
H2  
H2  
N
K
N
K
(14) (22)  
NSB0_00323b  
T1 T2  
A2  
96 98  
(14) (12) (24) (22)  
T1 T2  
A2  
96 98 06 08  
T1, T2  
NSB0_01398  
T/R  
T/R  
1)  
3RN10 12 , 1 NO + 1 NC  
3RN10 12, 2 COs  
Equipment designation for  
3RN10 22  
Y1 Y2 A1  
H1  
Y1 Y2 A1(A3)  
H1  
95 97  
95  
05  
(11)  
(21)  
(13) (21)  
H1  
"READY" LED  
"TRIPPED" LED  
"ALARM" LED  
Output relay  
H2  
H2  
H2  
K
N
N
K
H3  
K1, K2  
(14) (22)  
(14) (12) (24) (22)  
T1 T2  
A2  
T1 T2  
A2  
96 98 06 08  
96 98  
NSB0_00325a  
NSB0_01399a  
1T1 and T2 Connections of the  
2T1 and T2 sensor loop  
T/R  
T/R  
3RN10 13-...0 (monostable)  
. Important!  
Close unconnected sensor circuits.  
Y1 Y2 A1  
H1  
95  
05  
(11)  
(21)  
H2  
N
K
Equipment designation for 3RN10 62  
(14) (12) (24) (22)  
T1 T2  
A2  
96 98 06 08  
H1 to H6  
LED for the tripped  
sensor loop  
NSB0_01400  
T/R  
H7  
"READY" LED  
H8  
"TRIPPED" LED  
Output relay  
3RN10 13-...1 (bistable)  
K
Y1 Y2 A1  
H1  
95  
05  
(11)  
(21)  
1T1, 1T2  
to  
6T1, 6T2  
Connections of the  
first sensor loop  
Connections of the  
sixth sensor loop  
H2  
N
K
(14) (12) (24) (22)  
T1 T2  
A2  
96 98 06 08  
NSB0_00327  
T/R  
. Important!  
Close unconnected sensor circuits.  
3RN10 22  
07(23)  
Y1 Y2 A1  
H2  
95  
(11)  
H3  
N
N
K1  
H1 K2  
(14) (12)  
08(24) 2T1 1T1 T2  
A2  
96 98  
NSB0_00328c  
T/R  
3RN10 62  
Y1 Y2  
A1  
A2  
N
95 97  
96 98  
(13) (21)  
3
6
2
H1  
H4 5  
K
H7H8  
(14) (22)  
1T1 1T2 2T1 2T2 3T1 3T2 4T1 4T2 5T1 5T2 6T1 6T2  
NSB0_00329a  
T/R  
1) For units with combination voltages 230 V/110 V AC  
(3RN10 11-.CK00 and 3RN10 12-.CK00) the following applies:  
A1 and A2: 230 V AC,  
A3 and A2: 110 V AC.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/101  
3TK28 Safety Relays  
With electronic enabling circuits  
Overview  
The SIRIUS safety pilot guides you quickly to the right device  
Type  
Connection  
Crossover  
protection  
Category acc. to EN 954-1  
EMERGENCY- Protective  
STOP door  
Solid-state Cascading Safety mats  
sensors  
input  
24 V DC  
--  
1-channel  
2-channel  
B
1
2
3
4
3TK28 40  
basic unit  
--  
--  
--  
3TK28 41  
standard unit  
1
1
3TK28 42  
standard unit  
tv  
3TK28 45  
multi-function  
unit  
1
Type  
Enabling circuit,  
floating  
Enabling circuit,  
solid-state  
Signal- Autostart Moni-  
Switching capacity Rated operational  
voltage  
Rated control supply Control  
voltage inputs  
ing  
tored  
start  
circuit  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
AC-15  
at  
DC-13  
at  
24 V 230 V 600 V 24 V 115 V 230 V 24 V  
DC AC AC DC AC AC DC  
category category category category  
0
1
0
1
U=230 V U=24 V  
1)  
3TK28 40  
basic unit  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
2
--  
--  
1
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
0.5 A  
1.5 A  
1.5 A  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
3TK28 41  
standard unit  
2
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
3TK28 42  
standard unit  
tv  
1
3TK28 45  
multi-function  
unit  
1
2
1
1
2
1
1 HL  
1 HL  
2 A  
1.5 A  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
1) The outputs are only safe when an external contactor is used.  
= available  
-- = not available  
Design  
The solid-state safety relays can be used in EMERGENCY-STOP  
devices to EN 418 and in safety circuits to EN 60204-1 (11.98),  
for example, for moving covers and protective doors.  
Depending on the device type and the external circuit, the  
maximum category that can be achieved is Category 4 of  
EN 954-1 or SIL 3 according to IEC 61508.  
Installation  
For snap-on mounting on 35 mm standard mounting rail  
according to EN 50022. Screw fixing is also possible for the  
devices by means of 2 additional 3RP19 03 push-in lugs.  
Function  
The electronics (based on the example of a 3TK28 41)  
Y11 Y12 Y35 Y21 Y22 Y32 Y34  
1
A1  
7 The internal circuit is configured with redundancy and  
diversity. The processors monitor each other dynamically.  
7 The output drivers are also redundant and diverse. They are  
monitored by a cyclic self-test.  
7 All sensor signals are dynamically tested. This enables faults  
to be detected on the sensors, wires (cross-circuit) etc.  
FET  
µC  
1
µC  
2
7 The field-effect transistor (FET) is switched by both  
processors. The output driver must be activated  
simultaneously by one of the two processors. Only then is the  
voltage connected safely from power supply terminal A1 to  
output terminals 14 + 24.  
Output driver  
7 All solid-state switches (FET + output driver) are dynamically  
monitored by the processors.  
7 The required functionality (1-channel or 2-channel), monitored  
start or autostart, EMERGENCY-STOP, protective door and  
cascading is set by means of jumpers at the connection  
terminals.  
A2  
14  
24  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/102  
3TK28 Safety Relays  
With electronic enabling circuits  
Technical specifications  
Type  
3TK28 40  
3TK28 41  
3TK28 42  
3TK28 45  
1)  
Standards  
EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1), EN ISO 12100, EN 954-1, IEC 61508, DIN VDE 0116  
Category acc. to EN 954-1  
Test certificates  
3
4
4
4
V, UL, CSA  
Rated insulation voltage U  
• For control circuit  
• For outputs  
i
V
V
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50/300  
Rated impulse withstand voltage U  
• For control circuit  
• For outputs  
imp  
V
V
500  
500  
500  
500  
500  
500  
500  
500/2000  
Operating range  
• DC operation  
0.9 ... 1.15 × U  
s
Rated operational currents I  
acc. to IEC 60947-5-1  
e
I /AC-15  
at 115 V  
at 230 V  
A
A
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
2
--  
e
I /DC-13  
at 24 V  
A
0.5  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
e
2)  
Short-circuit protection  
Electrical endurance  
Operating frequency z  
Short-circuit proof  
Unlimited, because switched electronically  
Short-circuit proof  
in operating cycles/h during normal duty  
1/h 3000  
Response time  
• Monitored start  
• Autostart  
ms  
ms  
125  
250  
60  
60  
60  
60  
60  
60  
release time  
3)  
3)  
• For EMERGENCY-STOP  
ms  
ms  
30  
25  
45  
45 /0.05 ... 300 s  
45 /0.05 ... 300 s  
(adjustable)  
(adjustable)  
100  
4)  
4)  
• For supply failure  
100  
100  
Recovery time  
• For EMERGENCY-STOP  
• For supply failure  
ms  
s
20  
400  
400  
400  
0.02  
max. 7  
max. 7  
max. 7  
5)  
4)5)  
4)5)  
5)  
Bridging of supply failures  
ms  
25  
25  
25  
25  
Minimum command duration  
• EMERGENCY-STOP  
• ON button  
ms  
s
20  
0.02  
25  
0.2 ... 5  
30  
0.2 ... 5  
30  
0.2 ... 5  
Simultaneity  
ms  
Š
Conductor cross-sections  
Screw-type connection  
• Finely stranded with end sleeve  
• Solid  
2
2
mm 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5), 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)  
mm 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 × (0.5 ... 4)  
• Tightening torque  
Nm 0.8 ... 1.2  
Spring-loaded terminals  
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected)  
2
2
2
• Solid  
mm 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)  
• Finely stranded with end sleeve  
• Finely stranded without end sleeve  
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
mm 2 × (0.25 ... 1.0)  
mm 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 × AWG 24 ... 16  
Permissible ambient temperature  
• During operation  
• During storage  
°C  
°C  
–25 ... +60  
–40 ... +80  
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529  
• Enclosures  
Terminals  
IP40  
IP20  
Touch protection acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100  
Finger-safe  
Shock resistance  
• Sinewave  
g/ms 8/10 and 15/5  
Any  
Permissible mounting position  
1) Electrical equipment for furnaces.  
VDE certificate for 3TK28 41 and 3TK28 42 is available.  
2) For relay outputs, use a fuse link:  
LV HRC Type 3NA, DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE:  
6 A (weld-free protection at I = 1 kA).  
K
3) For instantaneous output.  
4) When the cascading input is supplied from A1, the maximum response  
time is applicable to an external EMERGENCY-STOP.  
5) The drivers are not supplied, internal supply bridging only.  
SELV/PELV power supply unit buffered.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/103  
3TK28 Safety Relays  
With electronic enabling circuits  
Dimensional drawings  
3TK28 with screw-type terminals  
3TK28 with spring-loaded terminals  
3TK28 40 to 3TK28 42  
3TK28 40 to 3TK28 42  
7
7
4
2,5  
NSC0_00677  
NSC0_00678  
15  
23  
5
36  
15  
22,5  
86  
5
65  
86  
3TK28 45  
3TK28 45  
3
7
4
7
NSC0_00673  
NSC0_00672  
37  
45  
5
115  
37  
45  
5
65  
94  
115  
1) For 35 mm standard mounting rail acc. to EN 50002.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/104  
3TK28 Safety Relays  
With relay enabling circuits  
Overview  
The SIRIUS safety pilot guides you quickly to the right device  
Type  
1-channel  
connection  
2-channel  
connection  
Crossover  
protection  
Category  
acc. to EN 954-1  
EMER-  
GENCY- door  
STOP  
Protective  
Enabling  
contacts  
Signaling Autostart Monitored  
contacts  
start  
B
1
2
3
4
Basic units  
3TK28 21  
3TK28 22  
3TK28 23  
3TK28 24  
3TK28 25  
3TK28 27  
--  
--  
3 NO  
2 NO  
2 NO  
2 NO  
3 NO  
1 NC  
--  
--  
--  
--  
2)  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
1)  
--  
2 NC  
1 NC  
2 NO +  
2 NO,  
delayed  
1)  
3TK28 28  
2 NO +  
2 NO,  
delayed  
1 NC  
--  
--  
Expansion devices (category as for basic unit)  
3TK28 30  
--  
--  
--  
--  
4 NO  
--  
--  
Press control devices (acc. to EN 574)  
3TK28 34  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
2 NO + 2 NC --  
3 NO + 1 NC --  
--  
--  
--  
--  
3TK28 35  
--  
--  
--  
= available  
-- = not available  
= corresponds to basic unit  
1) Only possible for instantaneous enabling contacts.  
2) The ON button is not monitored.  
Design  
The 3TK28 21 to 28, 3TK28 30 and 3TK28 34 safety relays  
operate with internal contactor relays with positively-driven  
contacts. The contacts of the controls comply with the  
requirement for positively driven operation laid down in  
ZH 1/457, Edition 2, 1978. NO and NC contacts are not allowed  
to be closed at the same time.  
Delayed enabling contacts  
Machine drives that overrun for a long time must be externally  
braked in the event of danger. For this purpose, the power  
supply for electrical braking can be maintained (Stop  
Category 1 according to EN 60204-1).  
The basic units have off-delay enabling contacts in addition to  
instantaneous enabling contacts. Time delays of between 0.5  
and 30 s are available with the different versions. A 3RP19 02  
sealable covering cap (see Catalog LV 1, Selection and ordering  
data, Accessories) can be fitted to protect against unauthorized  
adjustment of the set delay time.  
In a redundant circuit, operation of the internal controls is  
monitored. If a safety relay fails, it will always switch to the de-  
energized and consequently safe state. The fault is detected  
and the safety relay can no longer be switched on. The use of  
NO and NC contacts for the same function satisfies the demand  
for diversity.  
Expansion units  
This product series is characterized by its space-saving width  
(22.5 mm or 45 mm). The usual BIA, BG and SUVA approvals  
and test certificates have been awarded.  
If the enabling contacts of the basic unit are inadequate,  
expansion units can be used. An expansion unit has 4 enabling  
contacts.  
Enabling contacts (FK)  
Expansion units are not allowed to be operated separately in  
safety-related switching circuits; they must be combined with a  
basic unit. One enabling contact of the basic unit is required for  
connecting an expansion unit. The category of a control system  
with expansion unit corresponds to that of the basic unit.  
Safety related operation must be performed by safe output  
contacts, known as enabling contacts. Enabling contacts are  
always NO contacts and switch without delay.  
Signaling contacts (MK)  
NC contacts are used as signaling contacts but they are not  
permitted to perform functions with relevance for safety. An  
enabling contact can also be used as a signaling contact. A  
signaling contact cannot, however, be used as an enabling  
contact.  
Installation  
The equipment is designed for snap-on mounting on a 35 mm  
standard mounting rail to EN 50022. Screw fixing is also possible  
for the devices by means of 2 additional 3RP19 03 push-in lugs.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/105  
3TK28 Safety Relays  
With relay enabling circuits  
Technical specifications  
Type  
3TK28 21 3TK28 22 3TK28 23 3TK28 24 3TK28 30 3TK28 25 3TK28 27, 3TK28 34 3TK28 35  
3TK28 28  
Standards  
EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1), EN ISO 12100, EN 954-1  
BG, SUVA, UL, CSA  
Also EN 574  
Test certificates  
Category  
• Acc. to EN 954-1  
• Acc. to EN 574  
1)  
3
4
--  
4
--  
3
--  
As basic  
unit  
4
--  
4
4
As basic  
--  
--  
Type III C unit  
Rated insulation voltage U  
V
300  
3
III  
i
Degree of pollution  
Overvoltage category acc. to EN 60664  
Rated impulse withstand voltage U  
kV  
W
4
imp  
Rated power of coils  
DC/AC operation at 1.0 × U  
1.5  
3
4
3
s
Operating range of the coils  
• AC operation  
• DC operation  
0.85 ... 1.1 × U  
0.85 ... 1.2 × U  
0.85 ... 1.1 × U  
0.85 ... 1.1 × U  
s
s
s
s
Continuous thermal current I  
Continuous thermal current I  
A
5
6
5
6
5
th  
th  
for 2 to 4 enabling contacts (FK)  
2 FK  
3 FK  
4 FK  
• At AT 70 °C  
• At AT 60 °C  
• At AT 50 °C  
A
A
A
4
4.5  
5
3.5  
4
4.5  
3
3.5  
4
5
6
6
4
5
5
5
6
6
4
5
5
Rated operational currents I  
acc. to IEC 60947-1  
e
4)  
4)  
5)  
5)  
I / AC-15  
at 115 V  
at 230 V  
A
A
5
5
6
6
5/2  
5/2  
6
6
5/2  
5/2  
e
4)  
5)  
I / DC-13  
at 24 V  
A
5
6
5/2  
6
5/2  
e
Short-circuit protection  
Fuse inserts LV HRC Type 3NA, DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE: 6 A  
3)  
2)  
(weld-free protection at I = 1 kA)  
gL/gG operational class 6 A (slow), quick 10 A  
k
Mechanical endurance  
10 million operating cycles  
100000 operating cycles  
Electrical endurance at I  
e
Switching frequency  
1000/h on loading with I  
e
8)  
9)  
Response time  
• Monitored start  
• Autostart  
ms  
ms  
ms  
ˆ 30  
--  
ˆ 100  
--  
--  
ˆ 50  
--  
--  
--  
ˆ 200  
--  
ˆ 100  
ˆ 30  
--  
--  
ˆ
25  
ˆ 80  
ˆ 80  
6)  
6)7)  
ˆ 200  
--  
ˆ 150  
Release time  
• For EMERGENCY-STOP  
• For supply failure  
ms  
ms  
ms  
ˆ 20  
--  
--  
ˆ 50  
--  
--  
ˆ 200  
ˆ 200  
ˆ
80  
ˆ
20  
ˆ 200  
ˆ 200  
ˆ 25  
ˆ
25  
ˆ
25  
ˆ 100  
ˆ 150  
ˆ 350  
ˆ 100  
Recovery time  
˜ 250  
˜ 250  
• For EMERGENCY-STOP  
ms  
˜ 200  
˜ 200  
˜ 400  
˜ 200  
--  
˜ 200  
After time  
has elapsed  
˜ 1 s  
--  
--  
• For supply failure  
ms  
ms  
˜ 200  
˜ 200  
˜ 600  
˜ 200  
˜ 100  
˜ 500  
--  
--  
Bridging of supply failures  
60  
30  
80  
60  
35  
100  
30  
40  
40  
Minimum command duration  
• EMERGENCY-STOP  
• ON button  
7)  
7)  
ms  
ms  
˜ 200  
˜ 150  
˜ 25  
˜ 40  
˜ 25  
˜ 25  
˜ 200  
˜ 150  
--  
--  
˜ 25  
˜ 25  
˜ 25  
˜ 25  
--  
--  
--  
--  
Simultaneity  
ms  
Š
500  
Conductor cross-sections  
Screw-type connection  
• Finely stranded with end sleeve  
• Solid  
2
2
mm 2 × (0.5 ... 1.5), 1 × (0.5 ... 2.5)  
mm 2 × (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 × (0.5 ... 4)  
• Tightening torque, M 3.5 screw  
Nm 0.8 ... 1.2  
Spring-loaded terminals  
• Solid  
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected)  
2
2
2
mm 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)  
• Finely stranded with end sleeve  
mm 2 × (0.25 ... 1.0)  
• Finely stranded without end sleeve  
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
mm 2 × (0.25 ... 1.5)  
2 × AWG 24 ... 16  
Permissible ambient temperature  
• During operation  
• During storage  
°C  
°C  
–25 ... +60 (suitable for butt-mounting; 70 °C possible with restrictions)  
–40 ... +80  
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529  
• Enclosures  
• Terminals  
IP40  
IP20  
IP20  
IP20  
Touch protection acc. to VDE 0106  
Shock resistance, half-sine acc. to IEC 60068  
Permissible mounting position  
Finger-safe  
8 g/10 ms  
Any  
1) Only applicable for instantaneous enabling contacts; Category 3 applies  
for time-delayed contacts.  
6) At 24 V AC: 300 ms.  
7) At 115, 230 V AC: 300 ms.  
2) Signaling circuit for 3TK28 21 = 6 A.  
3) Other fuses on request.  
8) At 115, 230 V AC: max. 200 ms.  
9) At 115, 230 V AC: max. 80 ms.  
4) Instantaneous/time-delayed enabling contacts.  
5) 2 A applies to enabling contacts 13/14.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/106  
3TK28 Safety Relays  
With relay enabling circuits  
Dimensional drawings  
3TK28 (relay type) with screw terminals  
3TK28 (relay type) with spring-loaded terminals  
3TK28 21 to 3TK28 24, 3TK28 30  
3TK28 21 to 3TK28 24, 3TK28 30  
2,4  
4
7
7
NSC0_00674  
NSC0_00671  
15  
22,5  
5
115  
15  
23  
5
65  
94  
115  
3TK28 25, 3TK28 27, 3TK28 28, 3TK28 34, 3TK28 35  
3TK28 25, 3TK28 27, 3TK28 28, 3TK28 34, 3TK28 35  
3
7
4
7
NSC0_00673  
NSC0_00672  
37  
45  
5
115  
37  
45  
5
65  
94  
115  
1) For 35 mm standard mounting rail acc. to EN 50022  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/107  
3TK28 Safety Relays  
With contactor relay enabling circuits  
Overview  
The SIRIUS safety pilot guides you quickly to the right device  
Type  
Connection  
Crossover  
protection  
Category acc. to EN 954-1  
EMERGENCY- Protective  
STOP door  
Solid-state Cascading Safety mats  
sensors  
input  
24 V DC  
--  
1-channel  
2-channel  
B
1
2
3
4
3TK28 50  
basic unit  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
3TK28 51  
basic unit  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
1
3TK28 52  
basic unit  
3TK28 53  
basic unit  
3TK28 56  
expansion  
unit  
1
3TK28 57  
expansion  
unit tv  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
1
--  
Type  
Enabling circuit,  
floating  
Enabling circuit,  
solid-state  
Signal- Autostart Moni-  
Switching capacity Rated operational  
voltage  
Rated control supply Control  
voltage inputs  
ing  
tored  
start  
circuit  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
AC-15  
at  
DC-13  
at  
24 V 230 V 600 V 24 V 115 V 230 V 24 V  
DC AC AC DC AC AC DC  
category category category category  
0
1
0
1
U=230 V U=24 V  
3TK28 50  
basic unit  
3
2
6
3
6
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
1
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
6 A  
6 A  
6 A  
6 A  
6 A  
10 A  
10 A  
10 A  
10 A  
10 A  
--  
--  
--  
1
3TK28 51  
basic unit  
1 NC  
1 NC  
--  
--  
--  
3TK28 52  
basic unit  
3TK28 53  
basic unit  
3TK28 56  
expansion  
unit  
1
1 NC  
--  
--  
1
3TK28 57  
expansion  
unit tv  
--  
3
1
--  
--  
--  
--  
6 A  
10 A  
--  
--  
1
= available  
-- = not available  
= corresponds to basic unit  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/108  
3TK28 Safety Relays  
With contactor relay enabling circuits  
Design  
Function  
The solid-state safety combinations can be used in  
EMERGENCY-STOP devices according to EN 418 and in safety  
circuits according to EN 60204-1 (11.98), for example, for  
moving covers and protective doors. Depending on the device  
type and the external circuit, the maximum category that can be  
achieved is Category 4 of EN 954-1 or SIL 3 according to  
IEC 61508.  
The electronics (based on the example of a 3TK28 41)  
7 The internal circuit is configured with redundancy and  
diversity. The processors monitor each other dynamically.  
7 The output drivers are also redundant and diverse. They are  
monitored by a cyclic self-test.  
7 All sensor signals are dynamically tested. This enables faults  
to be detected on the sensors, wires (cross-circuit) etc.  
7 The field-effect transistor (FET) is switched by both  
processors. The output driver must be activated  
simultaneously by one of the two processors. Only then, the  
voltage is connected safely from power supply terminal A1 to  
output terminals 14 + 24.  
7 All solid-state switches (FET + output driver) are dynamically  
monitored by the processors.  
7 The required functionality (1-channel or 2-channel), monitored  
start or autostart, EMERGENCY-STOP, protective door and  
cascading is set by means of jumpers at the connection  
terminals.  
With these devices, solid-state safety relays are connected with  
contactor relays. The combination is supplied as a complete  
self-contained unit, fully wired up and tested, for snapping onto  
a standard mounting rail. This unit combines the advantages of  
a solid-state safety relay and those of contactor relays with  
positively-driven contacts in a single device. It has been certified  
by the appropriate authorities as a complete unit.  
Basic units, Category 3  
The solid-state safety relays 3TK28 50, 51 and 52 have two  
contactor relays snapped onto the safety solid-state unit as  
floating switch blocks. Three LEDs indicate the operating status  
and the function. During operation, all internal circuit elements  
are monitored cyclically for faults. Up to Category 3 according to  
EN 954-1 is achieved, depending on the external circuit.  
Y11 Y12 Y35 Y21 Y22 Y32 Y34  
1
A1  
Basic units, Category 4  
The 3TK28 53 solid-state safety relay has two contactor relays  
snapped onto the safety solid-state units as floating switch  
blocks, as well as a safe solid-state output, a safe input for  
cascading and one input for normal switching duty. Three LEDs  
indicate the operating status and the function.  
FET  
µC  
1
µC  
2
During start-up, the equipment runs through a self-test in which  
the internal electronics are checked for correct functioning.  
Output driver  
During operation, all internal circuit elements are monitored  
cyclically for faults.  
Expansion units and the 3TK28 30, 3TK28 56/57, 3RA7 11, 12,  
13, 14 devices as well as external actuators or loads can be  
connected using the safe solid-state output (terminal 2).  
Cascading with the 3TK28 41/42/45/53 safety combinations as  
well as with the 3RA7 11 load feeder is also possible using the  
safe solid-state output (terminal 2).  
A2  
14  
24  
Installation  
For snap-on mounting on 35 mm standard mounting rail  
according to EN 50022. Screw fixing is also possible for the  
devices by means of 2 additional 3RP19 03 push-in lugs.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/109  
3TK28 Safety Relays  
With contactor relay enabling circuits  
Technical specifications  
Type  
3TK28 50  
3TK28 51  
3TK28 52  
3TK28 53  
3TK28 56  
3TK28 57  
Standards  
EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1), EN ISO 12100, EN 954-1, IEC 61508  
Category acc. to EN 954-1  
Test certificates  
3
3
3
4
As basic unit  
As basic unit  
V, UL, CSA  
Rated insulation voltage U  
• For control circuit  
• For output contacts  
• For pollution severity  
i
V
V
50  
690  
3
Rated impulse withstand voltage U  
• For control circuit  
• For output contacts  
imp  
V
kV  
500  
6
Coil operating range  
• AC operation  
• DC operation  
0.85 ... 1.1 × U  
0.9 ... 1.15 × U  
s
s
Coil ratings  
• DC/AC actuation at U  
W
8.5  
s
Rated operational currents I  
e
acc. to IEC 60947-5-1  
I / AC-15  
at 230 V  
at 24 V  
A
A
6
e
I / DC-13  
10 (auxiliary switch blocks: 6)  
e
Short-circuit protection  
See Chapter 3, 3RH1 Contactor Relays, Technical specifications  
(Weld-free protection at I = 1 kA)  
K
Mechanical endurance  
Electrical endurance  
Operating frequency z  
30 million operating cycles  
See Chapter 3, 3RH1 Contactor Relays, Characteristic curves  
In operating cycles/h during normal duty  
1/h 1000  
Response time  
• Monitored start  
• Autostart  
ms  
ms  
200  
300  
200  
300  
200  
300  
60  
60  
--  
--  
--  
--  
Release time  
1)  
• For EMERGENCY-STOP  
ms  
ms  
30  
30  
30  
50  
50  
50  
/
increments  
0.05 ... 300 s  
120  
• For supply failure  
100  
100  
100  
120  
120  
Recovery time  
• For EMERGENCY-STOP  
• For supply failure  
ms  
s
20  
0.02  
20  
0.02  
20  
0.02  
500  
7
500  
7
500  
7
Bridging of supply failures  
ms  
5
5
5
5
5
5
Minimum command duration  
• EMERGENCY-STOP  
• ON button  
ms  
ms  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
30  
0.2 ... 5 s  
Simultaneity  
Š
Conductor cross-sections  
Screw-type connection  
• Finely stranded with end sleeve  
• Solid  
2
2
mm 2 × (0.25 ... 1), 1 × (0.25 ... 2.5)  
mm 2 × (0.2 ... 1), 1 × (0.2 ... 2.5)  
• Tightening torque  
Nm 0.5 ... 0.6  
Spring-loaded terminals  
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected)  
2
2
2
• Solid  
mm 1 × (0.2 ... 2.5)  
• Finely stranded with end sleeve  
• Finely stranded without end sleeve  
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded  
mm 1 × (0.25 ... 2.5)  
mm 1 × (0.25 ... 2.5)  
2 × AWG 24 ... 12  
Permissible ambient temperature  
• During operation  
• During storage  
°C  
°C  
–25 ... +60  
–40 ... +80  
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529  
• Enclosures  
• Terminals  
IP40  
IP20  
Touch protection acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100  
Finger-safe  
Shock resistance  
• Sine wave  
g/ms 8/10 and 15/5  
Any  
Permissible mounting position  
1) For instantaneous output.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/110  
3TK28 Safety Relays  
With contactor relay enabling circuits  
Dimensional drawings  
3TK28 with floating enabling contacts, with auxiliary-contactor enabling contacts  
3TK28 50, 3TK28 51, 3TK28 53, 3TK28 57  
with screw-type terminals  
3TK28 50, 3TK28 51, 3TK28 53, 3TK28 57  
with spring-loaded terminals  
38  
26  
38  
26  
6
6
1)  
1)  
NSC 00507  
NSC 00506  
90  
5
40  
5
40  
90  
91  
108  
108  
3TK28 52, 3TK28 56 with screw-type terminals  
38  
26  
6
1)  
NSC 00505  
90  
5
40  
91  
108  
146  
3TK28 52, 3TK28 56 with spring-loaded terminals  
38  
26  
6
1)  
NSC 00508  
5
40  
90  
108  
149  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/111  
Interface Converters  
3RS17 interface converters  
Overview  
Interface converters perform the coupling function for analog  
signals on both the input side and the output side. They are  
indispensable when processing analog values with electronic  
controls. Under harsh industrial conditions in particular, it is often  
necessary to transmit analog signals over long distances. This  
means that electrical isolation is essential due to the different  
supply systems. The resistance of the wiring causes potential  
differences and losses which must be prevented.  
Electromagnetic disturbance and overvoltages can affect the  
signals on the input side in particular or even destroy the analog  
modules. All terminals of the 3RS17 interface converters are safe  
up to a voltage of 30 V DC and protected against switching  
poles. Short-circuit protection is an especially important function  
for the outputs.  
The devices are EMC-tested according to  
• EN 50081 (basic technical standard for emitted interference)  
• EN 61000-6-2 (basic technical standard for immunity to  
interference)  
The analog signals comply with  
• IEC 60381-1/2  
Function  
Active interface converters  
Input voltage depending on the load at I = 20 mA  
a
Active interface converters provide maximum flexibility for the  
application by the use of an external supply voltage.  
Configuration with active interface converters is extremely easy  
because input and output resistances and voltage drops are  
compensated by the auxiliary supply. They support complete  
voltage isolation as well as conversion from one signal type to  
another or reinforcement. The load of the measured value  
transmitter is negligible.  
The following diagram shows the input voltage U as a function  
E
of the load R taking into account the voltage loss U . If the load  
B
V
is known, the y-axis shows the minimum voltage that has to be  
supplied by the current source in order to drive the maximum  
current of 20 mA over the passive isolator and load.  
U
/
V
E
N
S
B
0
1
3
1
3
a
2
2
,
7
2
1
0
Passive interface converters  
5
0
1
Passive interface converters do not require an external supply  
voltage. This advantage can only be used by current signals that  
are converted 1:1. Reinforcement or conversion is not possible.  
The converters are used for complete electrical isolation of  
current signals and to protect the inputs and outputs. Passive  
isolators do not operate reaction-free, any load on the output  
produces an equal load on the input. When the passive  
converter is to be used, the output performance of the sensor  
and the input resistance of the analog input must be analyzed.  
This technique is being increasingly implemented in the case of  
pure current signals.  
5
2
,
7
0
/
O
0
1
0
0
2
0
0
3
0
0
4
0
0
6
0
0
8
0
0
R
1
0
0
0
B
A
2
4
6
8
1
2
1
6
U
/
V
2
0
Current carrying capacity of the outputs  
A maximum output resistance is specified for current signals.  
This resistance value specifies how large the input resistance of  
the next device connected in series can be as a result of the  
power of the converter.  
For voltage signals, the maximum current that can be drawn  
from the output is the decisive factor.  
Calculation guide for passive converters  
Note: Please note the following when using passive isolators:  
2-way isolation  
The current-driving voltage of the measuring transducer U must  
E
In the case of 2-way isolation, the input is galvanically isolated  
from the output. The "null potential" of the supply voltage is the  
same as the reference potential for the analog output signal.  
be sufficient to drive the maximum current of 20 mA over the  
passive isolator with a voltage loss of U = 2.7 V and the load R .  
V
B
This means that:  
˜ U = 2.7 V + 20 mA × R  
B
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
3
1
4
a
U
B
E
I
N
O
U
T
Distribution of the voltages in the case of passive isolators  
V
c
c
2
-
w
a
y
i
s
o
l
a
t
i
o
n
U
B
U
=
2
,
7
V
V
3-way isolation  
I
For the 3-path isolation, each circuit is electrically isolated from  
the other circuits, i.e. input, output, and supply voltage do not  
have a potential connection.  
I
R
U
B
E
I
I
N
S
B
0
_
0
1
3
4
3
N
S
B
0
1
3
1
2
a
I
N
O
U
T
V
c
c
3
-
w
a
y
i
s
o
l
a
t
i
o
n
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/112  
Interface Converters  
3RS17 interface converters  
Technical specifications  
Type 3RS17  
24 V AC/DC  
24 ... 240 V AC/DC  
General data  
Supply voltage operating range  
DC  
AC  
0.7 ... 1.25 x U  
0.7 ... 1.1 x U  
0.8 ... 1.1 x U  
n
n
n
0.8 ... 1.2 x U  
n
Rated power  
W
V
Typical 0.3  
Typical 0.75  
Electrical isolation of input/output  
Active disconnector: 1500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min; 4000 V, 50 Hz, 1 min  
Passive disconnector: 500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min  
Rated insulation voltage U pollution degree 2  
Overvoltage category III acc. to DIN VDE 0100  
50  
300  
i
Ambient temperature  
During operation  
During storage  
°C  
°C  
-25 ... +60  
-40 ... +85  
Conductor cross-sections  
Screw terminals  
• Conductor cross-section  
- Solid  
- Finely stranded with or without end sleeve  
• Terminal screw  
2
2
mm  
mm  
1 x (0.25 ... 4)  
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)  
M3  
Spring-loaded terminal  
• Solid or finely stranded  
• Finely stranded with end sleeve  
2
2
mm  
mm  
1 x (0.08 ... 2.5)  
1 x (0.25 ... 1.5)  
Degree of protection  
Enclosures IEC 529  
Terminals IEC 529  
IP30  
IP20  
Permissible mounting position  
Any  
35  
Mounting onto standard rail EN 50022  
Vibration resistance IEC 68-2-6  
Shock resistance IEC 68-2-27  
Input  
mm  
Hz/mm 10-55/0.35  
g/ms 15/11  
Impedance  
Voltage inputs  
Current inputs, active  
kW  
W
330  
100  
Input voltage max.  
Voltage inputs  
Current inputs, active  
V
V
30 AC/DC  
30 AC/DC  
Response current  
Voltage drop  
Output  
Current inputs, passive  
Current inputs, passive  
µA  
V
100/250 (6.2 mm width)  
2.7 at 20 mA  
Impedance  
Voltage output, 0 ... 10 V  
W
55  
Output load  
Current 0/4 ... 20 mA active, max.  
Current 0 ... 20 mA passive, max.  
Frequency, min.  
W
W
W
400  
1000 at 20 mA, 400 at 20 mA (6.2 mm width)  
2.400  
Output voltage  
Frequency  
V
20.9  
Output current  
for supply voltage  
Voltage output 0 ... 10 V, max.  
Frequency, max.  
mA  
mA  
21  
10  
Short-circuit current  
Voltage output, 0 ... 10 V  
mA  
40  
Current output, 0 ... 20 mA, passive mA  
Corresponds to the input current  
15  
Frequency  
mA  
Protection of the outputs  
Max. overvoltage at output  
Accuracy  
Short-circuit resistant  
30  
V
Total error at 23 °C  
Active disconnector (frequency)  
Active disconnector (U, I)  
%
%
0.1  
0.1  
1)  
Linearity error  
Active disconnector (U, I)  
Active disconnector (frequency)  
%
%
0.02  
0.02  
Deviation due to ambient  
temperature  
Active disconnector (frequency)  
0 ... 50 Hz: 7.5 mHz/K; 0 ... 100 Hz: 15 mHz/K; 0 ... 1 kHz: 0.15 Hz/K;  
0 ... 10 kHz: 1.5 Hz/K  
Active disconnector (U, I)  
Passive disconnector  
0 ... 10 V: 1.5 mV/K; 0/4 ... 20 mA: 3 µA/K  
Width 6.2 mm: 100 ppm/K of measured value  
Width 12.5 mm: with load < 600 W: < 50 ppm/K of measured value;  
with load ˜ 600 W: < 175 ppm/K of measured value  
Transmission error  
Passive disconnector  
%
0.1  
Measured value load error  
Limit frequency at 3 dB  
%/W  
0.06/100  
Active disconnector (frequency)  
Active disconnector (U, I)  
Passive disconnector  
Hz  
Hz  
Hz  
30  
30  
50  
Rise time (10 to 90 %)  
Active disconnector (frequency)  
10 + 1 period  
10  
Active disconnector (U, I)  
ms  
ms  
Settling time  
at 1 % accuracy  
Active disconnector (frequency)  
Active disconnector (U, I)  
30 + 1 period  
30  
Residual ripple  
Active disconnector (U, I)  
Passive disconnector  
mV  
eff  
< 5  
< 8  
eff  
mV  
The accuracy refers to the measurement range end value if not otherwise stated.  
1) For 3RS17 06: 0.1 % for selected output 4 ... 20 mA; 0.3 % for selected  
output 0 ... 20 mA; 0.3 % for selected output 0 ... 10 V and from an input  
voltage > 50 mV. For an input voltage < 50 mV, an offset of max. 20 ms is  
effective at the output.  
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/113  
Interface Converters  
3RS17 interface converters  
Dimensional drawings  
6.2 mm design  
12.5 mm design  
17.5 mm design  
17,5  
84 1)  
6,2  
12,5  
1) Width for 3RS17 25 is approx. 90 mm.  
2) Dimensions for screw-type connection.  
3) Dimensions for spring-loaded terminal.  
Schematics  
3RS17 00-..D..  
3RS17 02-..D..  
3RS17 03-..D..  
3RS17 05-..D..  
3RS17 06- .FD00  
NSB01346  
2
3
4
5
IN+  
OUT  
0 V  
1
6
5
U,  
I
IN+  
IN-  
OUT  
0 V  
U,  
I
+/~  
1
U,  
I
IN-  
U, , F  
2
I
24 V AC/DC  
NSB01315a  
+/~ 7  
8
0 V  
24 V AC/DC  
3RS17 06-.FE00  
3RS17 0.-..W00  
NSB01318a  
NSB01319a  
1
6
5
1
6
5
IN+  
IN-  
OUT+  
OUT-  
IN+  
IN-  
OUT+  
OUT-  
U, ,  
I
U,  
U,  
I
I
U,  
I
F
2
2
7
8
7
8
+/  
~
24-240 V AC/DC  
24 V AC/DC  
3RS17 25-.FD00  
3RS17 25-.FW00  
NSB01347  
NSB01345  
1
1
6
5
6
IN+  
IN+  
OUT+  
OUT-  
OUT  
U,  
I
U,  
U,  
I
I
U,  
I
2
2
5
IN-  
IN-  
0 V  
8
8
+/~ 7  
+/~7  
0 V  
24 V AC/DC  
24-240 V AC/DC  
3RS17 20-.ET00  
3RS17 21-.ET00  
2
3
IN+  
OUT+  
OUT-  
1
IN+  
I
3
4
OUT+  
OUT-  
I
1
4
IN-  
I
NSB01344  
2
I
IN-  
NSB01317a  
3RS17 22-.ET00  
1
3
IN+  
OUT+  
(1)  
OUT-  
OUT+  
(2)  
OUT-  
(1)  
I
2
5
4
7
IN-  
IN+  
(2)  
I
I
6
8
IN-  
I
NSB01316a  
7
Siemens LV 1 T · 2006  
7/114  

相关型号:

3RT1966-4G

FRAME TERMINAL BLOCK FOR CONTACTORS SIZE S10/S12 FOR OVERLOAD RELAY 3RB106
SIEMENS

3RT20161AB01

CONTACTOR, AC-3, 4KW/400V, 1NO, AC 24V, 50/60 HZ, 3-POLE, SZ S00 SCREW TERMINAL
SIEMENS

3RT20261BB40

CONTACTOR, AC-3, 11KW/400V, 1NO1NC, DC 24V, 3-POLE, SZ S0 SCREW TERMINAL
SIEMENS

3RTI20E-080

DIODE and TYRISTOR MODULE
FUJI

3RU1136-4EB0

3RU11 for standard applications
SIEMENS

3RUS2

HIGH VOLTAGE, HIGH CURRENT ULTRA-FAST RECOVERY SILICON RECTIFIER DIODES
EDI

3RUS2120

HIGH VOLTAGE, HIGH CURRENT ULTRA-FAST RECOVERY SILICON RECTIFIER DIODES
EDI

3RUS2150

HIGH VOLTAGE, HIGH CURRENT ULTRA-FAST RECOVERY SILICON RECTIFIER DIODES
EDI

3RUS2180

HIGH VOLTAGE, HIGH CURRENT ULTRA-FAST RECOVERY SILICON RECTIFIER DIODES
EDI

3RUS4

HIGH VOLTAGE, HIGH CURRENT ULTRA-FAST RECOVERY SILICON RECTIFIER DIODES
EDI

3RUS4120

HIGH VOLTAGE, HIGH CURRENT ULTRA-FAST RECOVERY SILICON RECTIFIER DIODES
EDI

3RUS4150

HIGH VOLTAGE, HIGH CURRENT ULTRA-FAST RECOVERY SILICON RECTIFIER DIODES
EDI